The Journal of the Siam Society Vol. XLVII, Part 1-2, 1959 - Khamkoo

VOLUME XL VII Part 1
June 1959
SIAM S
THE
JOURNAL
OF THE
(JSS)
CIETY
BANGKOK
2502

With the Compliments of
:Mr. J.J. ':Boeles
Vee 1996

TABLE OF CONTENT$
VOLUME XL VII PART 1
Articles
John Black
G.H. Luce
£iterat~tre
James N. Mosel
CBoole Cf(eviews
C.D. Sheldon
Brooks Wright
The Insc1·iptions of" Khao Pr·a~ Vihar"
The Early Syam in Burma's History,
A Supplement
Notes
A Poetic Translation !1·om the Siamese
Prince Damrong' s Rep!J in Verse to Rama V
JUNE 1959
Page
'l'lte Rise of the Merchant Glass in TolctLgawa
Japan (E. Grant Meade) 113
1
59
91
103
I nte?'preter of Buddhism to the West : S·ir
Edwin Arnold ( K.E. Wells) 117
P.L. Vaidya Bauddhagama1·thasamgraha (Prince Dhani Nivat) 121
Cf{.ecent cf)iamese CJ'ublications
233. 'l.'he Life of the Buddha according to Thai Temple Paintings. 123
234. Kromaluav Dibyaratna: Letters to her nephew, Prince Par??Jat1·a
of Nalcon Svan; with the d·iary of a trip to Java by the Princess
Suddhadib, K1·omaluar; Sri Ratnalcosind.
235. Pra Rajavicarn, by King Ohttlalonglwrn.
236. NarOrJV?:jit, Pra: Repo1·t on a Siamese Diplomatic M·ission
to France.
287. In Dedication to Pmya Teparatna Narind, Royal
Exhortations, etc.
238. Sathienlcoses: Thai Seasonal Customs.
239. Sathienlcoses: Short Notes about Oustorns; about the Flonting of
Lamps and Benedictory Serv·ices.
126
127
128
130
131
132

Page
/240. SatMenlcoses : Benedictory SerV1:ces. 133
241. Vanarat, Somdec F?"a: Merit-mak,ing. 133
242. King Rama VJ: Pt'(f, RtbarJ Cfnd 'flw Triumph of Right. 134
248. Pariyativedi, P1'a: The Tt>pitaka in qbbreviated translations. 135
244. Bodhinanda, S. : Lectu?·es on the !Jistary Bu,ddhism. 135
Accession to the J:.ibrary 137
Special Presentation of Pul;lications by the Ambassador of Ind,ia 145

THE iNSCRIPTIONS OF "KHAO PRi.H VIHAR"
An English Translation from Learned French
Sources of all Inscriptions Associated with
the Mountain Temple
by
John Black, F.R.G.S.
INTRODUCTION
I have felt for some time that my wo1•k published in the
.Journal of the Siam Society XLIV, Pl.n·t 1, 195G, on "'l'he Lofty
Sanctuary of Khan Pral~ Vihar," would not he complete until
I had gathered together all references to the inscriptions
of the mountain temple under one heading ancl presented them
in English for the records of the Society.
In this considerable work it has been my good fortune
to have the guidance of that Master of Sanskrit and Khmer
epigraphy, M. George Ocecle8, a Pa:;t President of the Society.
At the outset I had his advice on sources of infonnation and
permission to use his works. Aftet· I had completed the translatiou,
M. Ocedus read the entire text and gave it his nppl'ova1.
.. r ~ : i '· ,
··I,,,.
'l'he works to which I !Hl>VP rdnrocl m·o the following:
Part I
Pal't
"PhuOI\l Pr{tl.t Vi hear"
from
Sanskrit Inscriptim1s of OampiL awl Cambodia
by
M. Abel Bergaigue.
II "'I'he Stt)les of T'hnnm Snnd;1,k and of T'ri'i.l.1
Vih'ar"
from
'l'he Bulletin de l'licolr )!'rtm

Johh Black
'l'hc ~ti1les transla.ted from the original script into l•'ronch
l1ear the following Inventory Numbers.
K. il80; K. 381; K. H82; K. B83.
The trani:\ltttion of the first two and last inscriptions is
the wrn·l{ of M. George Coedes, and tlutt of K. ~~82 iH associated
with M. Abel Bergaigne and 1\'L Auguste Barth.
In the tas1' of translation, tho work would not have been
possible without. the able assistance of Catherine Mary Smith,
M.A., Honours in :French and Germau, Edinburgh University and
Dipltnne Superieur de l'U ni versite cle Rennes. Miss Smith is
Hea(l of the :Modern Language Department. at St1·a.nru.er High
School, Scotland.
In the first part of my text, which is the work of M. Abel
Bergaigne, it. will be observed that certain footnotes terminate
in A.B. (Auguste Barth). A number of these footnotes, in the
original French text, provi(le a more correct translation than
that. given by Bergaigne. Where this is the case, at the suggestion
of :M. Ccedes, I have used. them in the body of my work-not
as footnot.es-bnt tu replace the wrong inteqn·etation by Abel
Bergaigne. It should he explained thu.t AbBl Be1·gaigne died
before he had time to revise his work and in editing Bergaigne's
numuscript Auguste Barth introduced many corrections. Out of
respect, howevet•, for his deceased colleugne he retltiued Bm•gaigne's
original text.
In purt. three of my text-lm;criptions of Cambodia, Vol. VI,
by ~L Coecles-w hero refPl'ence is made to the position of the
inscriptions in relation to the temple plan, it will be seen that
I have used the letters and numbers shown in the plan drawn
by H. Parmentier in his "L' Art Kinner Classique" in preference
t.o those ou my own plan attached to J.S.S. Vol. XLIV; 1, 1956.
In the final paragraph of my lecture on "The Lofi;y
Sanctuary of Khao Pral.1 Vih'ltr" I made reference to the work
of maintaining a.nd restoring mwient rnonumen ts. This gem of
a temple, on such a remadmble site, merits attention as soon as
the opportunity presents itself, and, if my study of the Sanctuary
a1Hl work on tbP Inscriptions provides some impetns in tho
tlircetion of rcst,nJ'aticm, I shn11 be amply rewarded.

SANSKRIT INSCRIPTIONS OF
CAMPA AND CAMBODIA
by
M. Abel flergaif!nC
,, .,. "
PHNOtyf PRAI:i VIHEAR
'J.'alwn from accounts and extract

4 John Black- Bergalgne
The Sanskrit inscription is written entirely in qlolms
anusb~ubh, at least in the part that has been preserved. Each

SANSKRIT INSCRIPTIONS OF CAMP A AND CAMBODIA 5
PhnOl!l Prul: Vihear, whero the ,;t(lle has been Eonnd, is
an important monument. situated in the province of 1\1elu Prey,
on one of the summits of the Dangrek mountains, between Meln
Prey and Koeukan. It consists of several towers and several
miniature temples. 'l'he stele was in the main tower.
M. Aymonier collected several other inscriptions in the
same monument. On the two sides of the inner door of an inner
gallery there m·e Sanskrit and Khmer inscriptions ( n° 150 of the
National Library) which bears dates fl•om 949 to 9()0 ~·aka and
the name of King Suryavarman. The same name is to be fonncl
on an inscription partly in Khmer and partly in Sanskrit, (n°151),
on the sirle of an inner door belonging to a small temple and in
front of this temple. Inclced, another inscription bears on two
large faces and two small ones a Khmer inscription ( n° 153)
whose elates rnn from 1034 to 1043, and on which the names of
Dlwralflllfh'avarman I ancl Suryavarman II can be 1·ead. Both
these kings belong to this period, and along with them the names
of several of their predecessors appear.
The inscriptions of Phnmfl Pritl.1 Yihoar at·e associated
with three periods. The Khmer inscription aclclecl at the hase
of our stele belongs to the second period. The four fragments
onght to be reacl in the same order as those of the Sanskrit
inscription, as can he seen in the relationship of the second line
of B with the first line of 0, the latter completing the word

6 John Blacl

SANSKRIT INSCRIPTIONS OF CAMPA AND CAMBODIA 7
a third whose name seems to have become lost in a gap which
occurs at stanza A, lH, where we cnu only read the words,
"the llrothe1·." 'l'here was 110 iloubt a l>nllll of relatiom;hip
lwtwocu all the pe1•sous mentioned nuo\'e uud l>etween all those
nanwll afterwards, although much of the information concerni11g
this J'olationBhip has heen lnHt from thP top of face A.
Prar.tava
originally :>tated in the text.
For the title of p~ithlvindropakalpa,
and 28. A.B.
ct. k:>hltindropakalpa of XV, B, HI

John Black- Bergaigne
We shall not again find the names of either Rndri11~1 or Samavecta ..
Pmi. married Pnrnshottmna ( 0, B) and had three children by
him ( 0, G): one son, Govimla, and two daughters, Madhavi and
Bhii.n. One of these, Mallhavi, mal'l'iell Ri.i.maba~ta
and had three
daughters by him, Pa]\, Av, An ( Ol' Oii,n r) and one SOll, Garu~la
( 0, 7 ); the othPr, Bhfin, married Vihhava:m ( 0, 8 ).
RBtnrning to Po1i's sister, Umi1, it certainly seems tluLt
it was she who gaYe llirth to the author of the iuscription,
Oivac;al the title devl "queen" ( ·ib•id. ); but
'
the name of her hushttml has disappeared at the top of face 0,
as also has the name of her son, although this has been assumed
from the "play of words" on the part which has remained intact.
'l'he inscription recalls s0veral donations of land by the
king- no doubt by different kings- generally on the occasion of
the erection of one or morf\ irlols by people whoso namrs are
given.
In the fl•agments of the second stanza, traces of which
are left at the top of face B, we see for instance, mention of
several idols erectetl in the village of Avilagramn.
'l'he chief
divinity of the place must luwe been yiva, invoked under the
name of Bhadrer,wara.
But two divinities must have l>een
mentioned because in stanza (B, G,) LakshmTndra, the brother of
Queen PraJ.la bestowed new honours. After both these statementslO
royal gifts of lands are mentioned ( B, 4 and 7 ), granted, it
would appem·, cumulatively to all the persons named in the
inscription, up to that point.
'l'hese particulars include the
clesignation of tho lauds showing their houndat·ies in relation to
the fom· cardinal points.
Again, fragments of a similar designation
arc to be found, right at the beginning, in the legible parts
10. Note in any case, after the first, and before the announcement of the
donation, a special division mark.

SANSKRIT INSCRIPi'IONS OI

10 John Elacl

SANSKRIT INSCRIPTIONS OF CAMPA AND CAMBODIA 11
1. .... Pavitra ....
TRANSLATION
A
2 ..... gave birth to a 1langhter who became n, woman
of virtue, Prabbavatl, whom she bare to the bhat~a
Ke

12 John Black- Bergaigne
8. He who was a leader and placed at the head of the
army, a hero capable of depriving kings of their fortune, obtained
the title of Ql'I-Nripendravijaya,
rendra.
Nadh.7
9. and another title greater still, that of

SANSKRIT INSCRIPTIONS OF CAMPA AND CAMBODIA
13
TRANSLATION
1.
B
2. having been erected at Avilagrama .... of the
melted butter, of a quantity of sixteen prasthas each ... .
3. And of white rice not husked, of a quality of five
Kharikas, 1 such is the salary 2 that has been fixed for each
year, out of devotion to lgvara named Bhadre

14 John Black-Bergaigne
9. Queen Kamvujalakshmi, a woman of virtue, faithful
to the duty of women ( strldhmnnna ), gave birth to a son named
Ori Dharmavardhana, who carried out the law ( dharmavar-
,
dhana ).
10. Hyancandra gave birth to a son named Paramartha

SANSKRIT INSCRIPTIONS OF CAMPA AND CAMBODIA
i5
G. PoD. had by Purushottama: Govinda, Madhavi, like
unto LakshmT, and another daughter named Bhan.
7. Madhavl married RiLmabha~~a and, by the power of
Qiva, gave birth to three daughters named Pan, Av and An,2
and Garuda besides.
8. Bhan, a woman of virtue, becmne the wife of a very
brilliant scholM (vibhavasu) named Vihhavnsu like the :llre, 3
(vibhavasu) incarnate.
9. Rajendrapm1

16 John Black-Bergaigrte
1.
TRANSLATION
D
2. eight (children) magnanimous sons: Hatati
(mira), Ni1Qi, 1 Brtthmavid, Prabhavajn'i.rka.
3. Sii,vitrT, Pancagavya, Vrau and Mii,dhavY were the
daughters, propagators of the law; 2 these eight had offsprings
who (like them) observed the law.
4. The wise minister of war named Salarp erected in the
village of SathalTgrama a new linga of Qiva in the year
designated by the arrows, the moon and eight.3
5. And the master, OivaQkti, who lmew the value of the
'
vowers ( galdi) of Qiva, who is the special seat of the power
( gakti) of 9iva, became the chief of the exponents of the
doctrine of Oiva.
'
6. Thanks to the passionless ( nirajas) mincl of this man
for whom the thought of virtuous people was a lotus seat. The
world was in some way purified by the dust of this lotus, which
was the foot of yivagakti (that is to say, by his teaching).
7. 'l'his wise man .... eloquent, whose riches was eloquent,
has, by his eloquence, made those who desired the brilliance of
his knowledge, shine like moons.4
8. In this clark world, when he was stopped by a fortress
(a difficulty), even surrounded by the host of enemies (by the
category of enemies5 ), his whole pleasure, in the midst of the
combat, was in appeasement.
1. Reading uncertain.
2. Or "lawful,"
3. 815, of the ~aka era,
4. Who reflected his own brilliancy.
5, Of inner enemies, that Is to say, passions.

SANSKRiT iNSCRIPTiONS OF CAMPA AND CAMBObiA
IY
9. '!'his yogin, who illuminated an regions of the sky
with his glory, darkened them at the same time eontimut11y hy
the smoke raised from the fires of his saerifiees.
10. 'l'his virtuous man who knew not the nH·auing of
injustice, had full lmowledge of justice; manifestly slow upon tlw
path of error, he was speedy along tho path of' goo

BULLETIN
,
DE L'ECOLE FRANCAISE o'EXTREME- ORIENT
Volnme XL.ll, Page 184, Hanoi, W48-111·11i
hy
G. Ctcd~.\
THE STELES OF PHNO":! SANDAK ( K. 194 ),
AND OF PRA.H YIHAR ( K. 383 )
Amo11g tho inscriptions which have emno from Pritl.1 Villar,
Aymonior refers, 1 nnrler the heading oE "stele of 8i1ryavarman
II," to" a stt1le of four faucs, two largE' aJHl two tlmall, fou]l(l
in front of the sanctuary." "It, is," he

john Black- Coed~s
mon to hotl1 in:::cl'iptious, which col'l'cspuudl:l with the iil'l:lt throe
quartel'S of tho written text, contributes to the establishment o£
an almost cornp lote text. The gaps which exist are almost insignificant
and some o£ them cmn even be fillec1 in with absolute cer.
tainty.
'fhe clocnuwn t thus roconsti tnted is interesting for more
than one good reason. First, it gives a biography o£ Divakarapal1~lita,
the spiri tnal adviser, protector ancl el:ltablisher of the
first ]rings of t.hat dynasty to which the two great sovereigns of
Oamhoclia belong, ruunely Sii.ryavarman II aucl .Jaynvttrman VII.
'l'heu, ai:l previously mentioned, it allows usofnl comparisons to
be made with the inscription of Sdok Kak Thom, certai.n passagos
of which it explains. :Finally, because of its language which
is infiuitely more precise, mol·e ilexible than that of Sclok Kak
Tho1u, and which presents no real difficulties of iutorprctntion, it
provide::; a renmrkable oxttmple of Khmer prose at t.he beginning
nE the t.wolfth century.
'l'he stele of Pbuo1~1 Sanu{tk ( K. 194) lay, at tile time of
Aymonier,3 brol

BULLETIN DE L'I:~COLE FRANCAISE , D'EXTREME- ORIENT 21
by a text o[ :\() lines spread over;) columns which are read in the
sanw mannlw as t.he columns of a newspape1·.
The stele of Pra]1 Viha1· which Aymonier found "in front
of the sanctuary," 6 and the location o:f which is not given by L.
de Lajonqui8re,7 would, according to H. Parmentier, act.ually he
"in the transept erE snJle Bl, croisillon 0," bnt there would be in
:mlle L, a pedestal which seems to correHpond to it.8 The rubbing
obtained by LajonqniEn·e, hy the ancient process, is quite good and
has the pm·ticular advantage of hrwing bee11 mttdc before the
breaking of the stone which, on H. Parmentier's Chine~e rubbing,
show8 an oblique crack prc;jndicial to reading.
On this stele, the common part of the inscription comprise:;
70 linef\, 48 nn the .first frtee and 22 on the second, where
it is followed by a text of i35 lines arranged in 7 columns. A
Kinner text of 7 lines in the same writing is inscribed on one of
tho 1Htr1·ow faces; on t.he othc1· aec engraved 2 Kinner texts of 10
to lil lines o[ :>lightly later

22 john Black- Coedes
'l'herofore, in lOH 0., ( 111~1 A.D.) or in the following
'
year, the King Suryavarman II, in the course of one of those
solemn andieuces, of which the bas-relief of the south gallery
of Angkor gives some idea, ordered the set,ting up of the inscription
in question, a sort of curriculum vitae of DivakaJ·apaJ_J.Stit.a
who at that time bore the title of bh.agavat piicln kamratei1 ai'i t11
guru. This title as we shall see, had been conferred upon him by
Jayavarman VI on the occasion of his coronation (A. lfi- lG ),
but in 1120 or 1121, he was destined to change it for the higher
one of dhuli je il kamrateit an, which figures 011 the post-scriptum
of the stele of Prill? Vihar.
'l'he biography of l>ivU.kara, nati\·e of Vnnr Dmtil in the
rlistrict of Sadyii (two localities equally uuknown ), nnd belonging
to the caste or sect of }carman tan (A- 1)), hegins in the reign of
Udayaclityavarman II (A, 9 -ll). This lcing appealed to him to
establish (doubtless, alcmg with other priests) the enlt of the
golden linga for which pm·pol:le he had cnnstrncted the mountaintemple
of Baphuon, in the centre of his capital. Udayadityavarman
II having l'eignecl f1•om lOGO -lOlili, and the establishing
of t.he golden linga not having tulwu place nnt.il nearly the
encl of his reign, c. lOtiO, or rather shortly afterwards, one may
infer that Divaka1·a was horn arouuc11040. It is difricnlt to esta.
blish l1is birth much uarlier, since he WitS still alive after 1120,
nncl moreo1'er it is not necessary, for the tl:xt says he has been
dedicatPd to the cult h·om his early youth; he must have been,
as eal'ly as his 20th year, "officer before the royal ling a."
Udayaclityavarmnn II's successor, his brother Har~avar.
man III, entrusted to Divalmrtt some clnty or function, the nnml~
of which has heen lost in a gap in the inscription of PhnOf!l
Sandak and is incnmplet.e on Prlil~ Villar: thi::; must be acaryapraclhana
( A,l2 -13). Then it seems, he rallied to the c!tuse of a new-
' comer who hacl 110 links with his prodeces:>ors, who seized power
in 1080, under the name of :Jayayarman VI, for it was Divakara,
who WitS chosen, by this latter pet·son, to celelll'ate his cot•ona.
tion in the capacity of vral~ gnru.

' ' . i . )..
BULLETIN DE L' ECOLE FRANyAISE D'EXTREME- ORIENT 23
From this period dates his good fortune and his attachment
to the new dynasty whose spiritual adviser he remains for
more than 40 years. In addition to the function of vral~ guru,
he obtained from Jayavarman VI, along with the title of bhagavat
pada kamraten ali ta guru Cri Divakarapandita the insignia
' .. '
of his new dignity: golden palanquin, white parasol, bearers
(A, 16). The king, moreover, no doubt on the occasion of his coronation,
entrusted him with the distribution of the ritual objects
made of precious metal, animals and slaves, to the principal
sanctuaries in the country, and with the carrying out of various
works (A, 16- 19 ); when the sovereign himself set forth
on pilgl.'images to the holy places of his kingdom, he was accompanied
by Divakara ( A, 16- 19).
His brother and successor, DharaJ;~indravarman I, was, like
himself, crowned by Divakara, whom he likewise entrusted with
the distribution of various articles and goods· in the temples
(A, 21-25 ). When, by a coup de force, a grand nephew seized
power in 1113, Divakara, for a second time, legitimised an irregnlttr
succession by_pJacing the crown upon the newcomer, who
assumed the name of Siiryavarman II (A, 26- 28 ). Here the
insCl•iption enumerates in terms very similar to those on the
stele of Sdok Kak Thoro, the different phases of the coronation:
initiation ( dilrsa ), study of the sciences ( siddhanta) and the
secret rites (vral~- Guhya ), ritual feasts ( QaStrotsava ), distribution
of gifts ( dak~i~a) (A, 28 - 33 ).
On this last point, the inscription of Phnorp. Sandak and
of PraJ: Vihar explains in the most interesting way the parallel
passage on the sMle of Sdok Kak Thom ( D, 64- 72 ). While
reading the latter, one might indeed wonder whether the gifts
offered to SadaQiva.-Jayendravarman by Udayadityavarman II
were personal gifts, honorariums (that is the meaning of
clak~i\la) or goods simply handed over to Jayendravarman for
him to distribute among the principal sanctuaries of the kingdom,
The first interpretation conforms strictly to the terms of
the st. (XCV- CXVIII) of the Sanskrit text which the Khmer

24 John Black - Coed~s
language paraphrases without making explicit the point which
interests us. The second might argue the fact that, according
to the Sanskrit text (st. OXIX ), Jayendravarman, did in point
of fact, distribute costly gifts to Bhadret;.vara and to t.he other
gods; confirmation of what has just been said may also be found
with regard to Divi1kara who, without any possible doubt, was
commanded by Jayavarman VI and Dhara:J?-Tndravarman I to
distribute goods to the temples. 'I'he solution to this problem
is suppliecl to us by the inscription of PhnOJ? Sanclfi.k and of
Pral)- Vihiir, which shows that the one interpretation docs not
exclude the othyr. We have just seen that, besides the gifts
destined for the temple, Jayavarman VI had handed over to
Divi1kara the insignia of his rank. Siiryavarman II did likewise,
but besides new insignia denoting promotion (a palanquin
with 5 heads, two peacock feather fans with gold handles, to
which he as yet had no right, four white parasols instead of one
(A, 29- 30 ), he gave to Divakara "for him to lwep" (pi dnl;:,
A, 31 ), a whole set of precious metal, the elements of which are
almost identical to those present.ed to .hyendrav~:.~rman by
Udayadityavarman II.) As for the articles distributecl to the
temples, the enumeration of which is the subject of another
paragraph (A, 37 ~ 40 ), they are completely distinct from those
presented to Divakara "for him to keep." But although Jayen.
dravarman had consecrated to BhaclreQvara the gifts which
Udayaclityavarman II had given to him personally (according
to the Sanskrit text), we shall see Divakara dedicate to Qilrhar'iQ­
-vara (Pra~1 Vihar) the magnificent set which Suryavarman II
had given to him ( B, 1- 2 ). Besides, this appears to have been
a well established tradition, for this handing over of royal
presents to a sanctuary is verified by anothe~· well-known
document, the inscription of Pd.lt Nok, according to which
General Satigri1~a presented. to the golden linga of Baphuon the
booty which Udayadityavarman II wished to bestow upon him
in recognition of his victories,IO
10, JSCC 1 pp. 145, 172.

BULLETIN DE L' ECOLE FRANCAISE D'EX'l'REME. ORIENT
'
From what has just been established we can conclude
that in the inscl'iption of Sd

26 John Black - Coedes
Next follows a list of goods lu.mcle

BULLETIN DE L'I~COLE FRANCA!SE D'EXTREME- ORIENT 27
made of p1~ecious metal, had the towers, the courts and the main
entrance redecorated annually, and distributed emoluments to
all the personnel of t.he tomplo from tho t.eaellor to the humblest
servants ( B, i3 • 6 ).
'
•ro 9ivapl1l'a Dandem, that is to say, to Phno!p. Sancl;!k,
Divakara made identical donations ( n, 7 -12 ), bnt these did not
include, as can be unclerstoocl, the gold set he had received as a
personal gift and which he had reserved for the sanctuary of
Prill: Vihar. 'l'he bounclal'ies of the villages presented and the
list of slaves are inscribed on the second face of the stele of
Phnorp Sanclak ( B, 21. 55) following upon the common inscription.
At OampeQvara, perhaps Pritsitt K6k Po, similar donations
are mentioned ve17 bdefiy and without detail ( B, 12-13 ).
The following paragraph ( 13, 13- 1(\) is rather curious.
It concerns lQvarapura, Bantay Srei, whose foundation is imputed
to the vra~1 guru of J ayavarman V ( B, 14) in complete agree.
ment with the results obtained by epigmphical research. 11 The
sacred goodi:l, lands and slaves had been i:lquandered by the
"respectable" ( pliclamula) chief or guardian, and, when Snryavarman
II offered the temple to Divaka1·a, the latter was obliged
to redeem them ancl restore the cnlt which had no doubt fallen
into abeyance.
The following passage (B, 17. 20) refers to events which
are unknown to us. It concerns lands which appear to have been
confiscated from various gurus who had been guilty of some
misdeed. Divakara received permission from the king to restore
these to their former owners.
The last paragraph (B, 20. 22) relates that in 1041 q.
(1119 A.D.), the very year of the erect.ion of the ste1es of Phno!p.
Sandak and Pral;t Vihfir, Suryavarmrm II continued the work
of the arrangement ancl improveme11t of the village of Divfilmra,
who must at that time have been an octogenarian.
11. DEFEO, XXIX, p. 129.

28 John Blacl' - Cocd~s
Here ends the common text. As has been noted above,
each of the two inscriptions next giV()S the boundaries of the
village aml the list of slaves offered to t,he temple in which the
inscription was placed. The st(lle of Phnmp. San detween
1041 Q. (1119 A.D.) ancl1045 Q. (1121 A.D.)Divalml'a was promoted
to the dignity of clhnli :iert lmmraten aii. This is, in effect, the title
which these two texts give him, the first of which (D, 1-10),
after a date (in ruins), mentions an order by Suryavurman II,
relating perhaps to this promotion, and the second (D, 11- 23),
dated 104il 0. (1121 A.D.), tells of the purchase by Divakara of
'
two pieces of land which he presented to the yivalirtga of Vnur
Dna11, his native conntl'y.
The linga named kamrater1 jngat,
must have been a "personal" linga like the Jayendravarme

BULLETIN DE L'IkOLE FRANCAISE D'EXTr&ME. ORIENT 29
'
TRANSLATION
I. Hommago to thee .... HnrnmngP to thr•e, u thonsanrt times,
ten thonsnnd times, tcm million times ... , lil

30 John Black- Coedes
8-9. 'I' he venerable lord Gnrn Ori , Di v akarapandita, .. from
the region of Vnur Dn:u1. in the district of Sadya, 7 of the sect
of Karmantnra, third eateg;ory,8 train\)cl in revealed knowler1gr
.... (from his) youth never ceased to loarn and to teach all the
sacred texts (itgama) and to practice asceticism.
9-11. In the reign of S.M. yri Udayadityavarmadeva,
who ascended the throne in 972

BULLETIN DE L'IiCoLE FRANCAISE , D'EXTREME.ORIENT 31
PltlJ~lita. He rleigncd to present to him a go]

John Black- CoNies
erect (statues), distribute riches, to wit: golcJ.en bowls, goblets,
ow.;,rs, spittomtS, elephants, horses, slaves to Brahmans and to
Pnnclits of every category, to the poor and to the neglected.
2G-28. In 10:35 ~:alm (1113 A.D.) when S.M. Or! Surya-
'
varmndcvn, great nephew in the maternal line of S.M. yri
.Tnyavarmadeva and of S.M. yl'l Dharm;"indraval·mndeva, acceeded
to the holy kingship, he invited the venerable lord Guru Ori
'
Divii.karapa1!9-ita to curry out the functions of Vruh Guru in
order to celebrate the royal curnation.
28-33. Then His Majesty accomplished the holy initiation
( vral:- dik~a), made a study of all tho lmowledge (siddhan ta),
beginning by the sec1·et science (vra:tt gnhya), celebrated all the
ritual feasts (

BULLE'l'IN DE L'~COI.E FRAN~AISLivakarap:u.H}ita
made a pilgrimage to otl'er goods to all the tl'mpleH, lwginui 11 g
with K .. J. B had re~·nu·a, 2 t following the sacrL'\'P dPHt.inPd to be
pt·escnted to all the templ

34 John Black- Coed~s
it slaves mall:' and female. He presented the villages of Madhyn.­
matle~n of 'l'ai1kal and the clea1·ea lands

BULLETIN DE L'r:;COLE FRANCA!SE D'EXTHi~ME. ORIENT 35
int~titnt

36 John Blad< - Coedes
7-10. 'l'o K .. J. Oivapnra Da11dmn37 .... ( lH· gave) thl' vil-
'
]age~ of Uarai1, 'l'vai1 .Je'u, .Khcow,38 dug a pool, built a place of wm·-
::~hip,
placed iu it slavc•s, hoth men and women all toget.l!.er, and
presented all manne1· of goods.
'fho tlaily supplies are: dancers,
singers, buffoon:-;, mnsiciaus, hmkeclrico, oil, sacred cloth, candles,
incense, the requisites for the ablution, fonr ( Jdncls of) oil, flowers
for the cnlt, recevtaclcs for Howers.
'l'ho goods otrm·ed are:
golden bowls, ring;;, jewels, stands, enp:-l, ewel't'\ 1 i:ipittoous, elephant::;,
hnr~>es, white parnsolioi, tiered pal·aso}K, rllal_1. :;pittoons,
jugs, dlal.1 hasius, jars, trays, tapestries nnrl iunumerable cloth.
Ht• covered the towm•s, the conl'ti::l and the causeway.
11-1:2. Th• made PJ't'Scmts to the lord teachel', to the lord
( p1·ies1~) who officiate (in tum) each fnl'tnight, to the Oonrt, to
tho chief nf the r1istl'ict, to the head nf the people, to all tho
::;erv:mts male nnrl female, or all castes, atmually.
12-la. For K.J. {Jri OU.mper;.vara, tho veJ\Cl'tthle lord
Gut·n yl'i Tli\·ilmrap:t~l~1itn
honght a piece of ground, lmilt a villagL~,
fonwlt•.d a place nf wonJhi p, placed slave::; male and femalP,
instituted a set·viee of supplies, in aceordancc with tho list
engraved upon the inscription:39
lil-1'7. To K .. J. It,'VIlraplll'

BULLETIN DE !)ECOLE FRANCAISE D'EXTREMJ

SPECIAL TEXT ON THE STELE OF PHNO¥ SANDAK
AND ON THE STELE OF PRAH VIHAR
( hom Face JJ )
Translation
C. 1-li .... the people .... who prei:lerve in perpetuity ....
this foundation, these people will enjoy h cmven and ;;al v ation.
'l'hose who destroy this stone inscription, those people will go tn
the tltiJ't,y-two hellll, tti:l long as the snn and moon endure.
n. 1-10 .... 9a1m .... of t,he ere:;ceut moon of Pu~ya,
nak~atra .... a ( pa,da) one antvai1 dik, tht•ee Yinadilm, at that
moment .... S.M. yri Suryavarmncleva commanded .... Tlhuli Jen
Kamraten Ai1 yt·! Divii,lutrapa~H!ita .... all the goods .... as an
offering.
11-2H .... 10,1il 9alm, niuth day of the crescent moon of
Mitgha, Wednesday: Dhuli Jm1 Kmnratm1 Aii 01'1 Divalutl'apandita
' ..
acquired a piece of laud in a place called .... Karol Cyn{l., placerl
boundat·y stones around it, gave it the name of Rndri'tlaya and
preseuted it to the K1tnn·atei1 Jagat Oivaliitga of Vnur Thwi1 ... ;
'
in another place, having acquired the land of Them 'l'hku, placed
l1mmdary ~tones
around it, gave it. the name o£ Pai]eayajr.la and
presented it to Kamratei1 Jugat. Civaliitgu of Vnur Dnan.
,

INSCRIPTiONS OF PRAl:l VIHAR
From Volume VI
lNSORTP'l'IONS OF OAll:fiiU])JA
by
G. Coedes
(Paris, 1954)
(K. 880 - 888 )
Aymonier tliscovered, at Pr:.\l.t VihU,r, two 8tt':les al\tl two
gronps of inscriptions on pillars.!
'l'he Sanskrit inscription in 11U.garT characters ( K. H82)
was seen by Aymonicr "in the t:~nnctnary"
tmd by L. Lajonqnit)re2
"in the front of the sanctuary." H. Parmentier3 assumes
that it was originally in the vPstibule to the south of gopura li
(D), where a square block with mortise may hnve serYed as a
support;. However that may he, thiH stele has disn.ppPared. It is
perhaps in Siam ~Lt Sisll.lwt, pt·nvincial capital, RO kilometers
north nl' Pt·ftl~
Vihi1r ( anrl not at Vat Sisal,et in lhngkok- a
mistake for Ynt S{tket- as P

4o
John Biack- Coedes
the sonth pillni' of the door below the west vest.ibnlfl in tlw south
gallery (H) ol' tho mmmnwllt, to the~
east ol' gopn1•a Ill ( whern
Aymouier \Vl'Ollg]y plnces tht• inscl'iptimi or the· nast pillar ltlOllt.j
one d almve ) .
Since tho publication of the Sanskrit sti31P hy A. Bergaigne,4
it is wm·th repeating that the epigraphy ol' PJ·:-Lh VihfLI'
beginl:l with the inscription ot' Ya\ovarmau, but, HH we shall see,
there is nu reason to attribute to this inscription a clnJ,c previous
tn that of the short Khmer inscription which is engrave11 beneath,
that is, %9

South Pillar of the West Door of Gallery H
( J(. 381)
'l'his inscription contains ~2] lines: \) Kluucr lines nnd 12
Sanskrit lines forming three Sl'agdhara c;tanzas.
'l'he writing,
which is big anrl 1·nther elaborate, has snfl'ererl l'l'Om we.ar and
tear, but apart from o11P gap at the begin11ing, can be almost
perfectly rend.
'l'he elate by which thn Kluncr text begillH is prolHthly
94G c;. ( 1024 A.D.). It mentions a fact \Vhich the uefn.cocl part
prevents us from understanding exactly, lmt which, from the
wordi:l of the curse in lines il-'1, was certainly of a religious fonntlation.
The following lines give to all anonymous Vrah Kamratmi
An, who must be 'l'apasvTncl1·apa~1\lita-
in the inscription -
named ni'tenv~mls
an exclusive right to certain propertie~;.
'l'his person who was the chief of a hermitage heming his nnni.e
( 'l'apnsv'inclri1

42 John Black- Coed~s
as well as over all the suitable objects: they are mentioned in n
written ngreement 2 conformable to the foundation of V.K.A.
which the king ordained to be earl'iecl out in :wcordauce with
Y.K.A.'s desire.
7-9. In 948 (}aka, V.K.A. Tapasvindrapan~ita gave goocls
as a presentation for the new year to K.J. Ori Cikhareevara: ti
' 1 ' !
gobhik~a, viLt weighing 2 jyai1, 10 Ui1, 4 bracelets .... this collection
of trays, basins, cows, buffaloes, elephants, villages, lands
and slaves belonging t.o 'rapftsvindra.rn.ma.
10-12. I. He whose glory, like the heavenly tree planted
today in the ground, is placed upon the chaste surface of the
altar of Agni, grows in the confines of the seven worlds, gladdens
the hosts of the inhabitants of heaven by his manifold and
renowned fruits, watered continually by the How of his donation~:~,
and covers the cardinal points by the shade of his eminent
virtues, the king Or! Siiryavarman received the excellent king-
,
ship (in the year marked) by the (9) openings, t.he (2) arms and
the (4) oceans3.
14-17. II. Having observed the manner of (Agnstyn)'s
giving, (Agastya) who was born in a pitcher, who had drunk then
vomited the ocean, this (king) who had in his mouth an ocean of
inconceivably great knowledge gave to the best of the wise men
who bear a name beginning with neva, ending with pa1.1

INSCRIPTIONS OF PRAti VIHAR 43
18-21. III. With ardent devotiou the aforesaid CrT ,
Tapasvlnclrapai.H)ita gave to 9r1 Siiryavarmau, spiritual master
of the three worlds, all the merit acquired by his voice, his mind
and his body: lord of the monntain5, ho gave to this hermitage,
ornament of the mountain .... a famous uarne ending in l11,~1·ama
and beginning with Tapasvfndra.
5. Instead ~f cira, which seems almost certain, one would prefer
'•at the summit of the
mountain." ' Cidi (for ciras, nominative) could only apply to Tapasvi:ndrapal_l~ita,
' the expression, '
dharaiJ-idhara~iras, is no doubt an
cirasi-which woul~ not suit the metre-or ~ire
equivalent of khlon vnam "chief of the mountain," or, in the less
poetical Sanskrit, ~ailadhipa.

Pillars of the South Door of Gopura D
(K. 380)
These iuscriptious arc of paramount interest in the
history of the monument of Praq Villar, but Aymonier who has
given a summary of them has drawn but scant conclusions from
their concrete facts. They comprise several distinct texts, with
closely related dates, which have the common characteristics of
making reference to the miraculous powers of the holy place.
These texts can be divided into three groups.
I. A Sanslnit inscription comprising 10 lines on the west
pillar (ll. 1-10) and 27 lines on the east pillar (11. 29-55).
The reasons which cause me to connect these two separate
fragments int.o one single text are as follows: (1) The writing
and spacing of the lines are identical; (2) Assuming that the
inscriptions of the two pillars, which are of unequal leugth,
ended almost at the base, at the same level, tho first line of
tho Sanskrit text on the west face is at the same height as
the first line of the Sanskrit text on the east face (1-29
of the total inscription); (B) These two fragments, about
20 years previous to the Khmer inscriptions engraven on
the same pillars, have no connection with the latter; on
the other hand they complete each other very well, with the
10 lines of the west pillar being composed of in vocation
formulae and the 27 lines of the east pillar containing a
eulogy of the king and the announcement of a foundation
in 940

INSCRIPTIONS OF PRAJ:I VIHAR 45
IV. A Khmer text of 971 r;. ( 104H A.D.) comprising 4 lims
eugraven at the base of the weHt pillar.
Here now, is the subject matter of. these diverBc texts
which will be published later, not in the logical am1 ehronological
order hitherto indicated, but according to the position which they
occupy on the pillars.
I. 'l'his Sanskrit inscription, in very bad condition, is composed
of 20 stanzas in all, which from the point of view of metre
arc divided as follows:
arya:
mii,lini:
sragdhara:
Qi1rrlnlavikridita:
I-V, XVIII- XX
XII- XVI
IX- XI, XVII
VI- VIII
The first 5 stanzas, those which arc written on the west
pillar, contain only invocations, the last. of which at least is of
vislmui te inspiration.
'rho text engra ven on the east pillar is
in a poor' state of preservation, but by a lucl'Y chance, all too
rare in epigraphy, the only passage which gives a complete
reading is the one which is really interesting. As a matter of
fact, whereas tho :;tanzas VI to XVI are devoted to banal praise
of the king, the stanza XVII tells of the founclat,ion by Suryavarman
I of a series of "personal" li1iga Siiryavarme

46 John Black- Coedes
Knl'uksotrn l who cttl'l'ied out; the duties of Recorder in the
. '
o:anctuary of yiklun·e

INSCRIPTIONS OF PRAJ:I VIHAR
2nd: Warriors and princes ( Vlrll rajak~atra) from Vrai Sam­
Ian (11. 17-19).
3rd: 'l'he people named "of Vhavrmnan" ( ll. 19-:21 ).
4th:
5th:
People from Jei1 Vnm"!l forming pa1·t, it seems, of the
en tour age of tho Snkarman of the preceding inscription
(11. 21- 2B ).
'l'he people from Thpal Sm.nla't1 ( 11. 23-2f> ). The end of
this first part concerns the cngnwi11 g of this oath on the
stone.
'l'he second part, three and a half months later than
the preceding nne and dated Gth 1lay of t,he crescent moon of
l\fargagira of the same year, contains another royal decree
1lestinerl to exclurle from the obligations and benefHH of this
oath a section of the people named Pas Khmau,2 who had a
certain but rather ohscurc connection with the people nf the
hermitages constituting the fir~>t group of those who hatl taken
the oath. 'l'he main interest of this part, is that, in lines 58 to
GO, it is more explicit than the preceding ones concerDing the
reineur11ation of the god Bhach·c'

John Black- Coedes
TRANSLATION
West pillar
I-III. ( def:acr:Hl)
IV. May you he pl'otectetl by the palm oE the hand .... whose
surface is red and which has the brillbuco of the snn on
the snmmit o:t: the mountain of rubies.
V. May you be succoured by the Jisc of Vi~hl,lll, which at iti:l
extremity i:; reddened lJy the How nf bloo

INSCRIPTIONS oF- PRAI:I viHAR 49
15-19. There is a family which keeps the writings conceruing
the family of Kambn and the various departments of
the royal service, the writings concerning the noble deeds of the
sovereign8 from S.M. yrntttvarman to those nf His Ma:iosty
yri Suryavarmacleva, 1\insman of S.1\T. yri llldt•avunnan whn
went to the i9varaloka ancl (as far as those of) Queeu K.A,
ql'l Vhalak~mi of Vrae (district) of Vra]f Sruk, kinswcnna11 o£
S.M. Ori Harsavnrnwtleva who went to Rudralolm aud of S.M.
' . . '
9rr ic;anavarrnadeva who went to Paramarudralolm.
19-21. rl'he collection of these sacred writings is kept (by
his care) on the leaves which are deposited at K.J. Or! Oikhari

56 john Black -Coed~$
VI. 27-28. 'l'he village named Vibheda given by the king of
kings, Cri Siirynvarman, to Sukarman who came from Ku-
'
ruk~etra,
has, because of that, been called Knrul

I.
Om!
INSCRIPTIONS OF PRAI;I VIHAR
East Pillar
Homage to the gurus, the foremost of whom is Oiva!
Prosperity to Or! Siiryavar.macleva!
'
Successl 1
1-3. In 960 gaka, seventh clay of the decrescent moon
of 91·ava~1a, S.M. yri Smyavarmadeva made his way to the
audience chambor, 2 in the town of Ot·i Yavodharapura to notify
,
the following to V.K.A. Or! Rii,japativarman, grandson of V.K.A.
'
Ori Rajapativarman the elder, of the district of Avadhyapura.
4-5. K.J. Ori Bhadvegvara of Lingapura came ancl was
'
reincarnated at Or! Oikharlqvara, manifesting his holy power in
, '
visible fashion.
5-9. 'l'he people of the hermitages of Prasfi.n Vrai Rmyo.t
Thyen Kancanapura Kurnn Tanmer, 3 who belong to the ho1y
family of S.M. CrT , Siiryavarmadeva, assembled at K.J. CrT ,
Oildlari~:v!n•a. ,
(The King) gave orders to call .... the elders and
the notables of all theBe countrieB and to lead the family and
the attE'mlants (relatives )4 of these people to KJ. Ori Oikha-
rl

52 John Black- Coedes
go) and fight to defend the go

INSCRIPTIONS OF PRAJ:I VIHAR 53
territory of Je1i Vnai!l who m·e within rotteh, are commanded to
take the original oath of fidelity to the goc1,13 in accordance
with the formula (of the people) of Snkarm~i.. likewise.
2iL25 In the section of 'l'hr}al Samlan . , Thr)al Samlaii .
making no effort to show his allegiance towards the god, let them
call the families and their people to come ancl swear an oath of
fidelity to the god also.
25-28 It is the lineage of Phalapriya)4 that is entrusted
by CrT Oikharlgvara to make all these people swear allegiance;
. '
these five oaths15 are engraven, upon a stone pillar in (the temple
of) the god and pt•eservecl on leaves at Kanlo11. These people
m·e commaucled to recommend their ftlture descendants to
endeavour to give proof of their fidelity to I\.J. Orl Oikharigva.ra
' '
by snhmitting to this oath on all points.
VI-XVII. 29-50 (En logy of the king which is much defaced).
'l'he linga Ori Siiryavarmet,~vara (established) first at CrT
.hynksetra,l6 this yrT Suryavarman later erected it 'in
three places simultaneously: one at the summit of the moun.
tain of CrT OikharigV~1l'a, another at Ori I

54 John Black- Coedes
XVIII-XX. 5i~-55
(Ruined).
56-58. In 960 9aka, sixth day of crescent moon of Margagira,
His Majesty deigned to notify V.K.A. yrT Vagindrapa~(Fta,
of the district of Vagindra, whom the people call
V.K.A. Rnclra, to char gc him to give notice of the ( fol1owing)
royal decree to the elders and the notabilities (of the personnel)
who are in possession of the holy hermitages at Prasan Vrai
Rmyat Thyen Kaiicanapura Kurun Tanrner and of the holy
pavilion.20
58-62. S.M. Ori , Suryavarmadeva obtained by the power
of his asceticism ·that K. J. BhaclreQvara of Lirigapura should
come and reign at yri yikhnrfc;vara and manifest his power in
visible fashion so that all might see him. He enjoined the
people of these different hermitages to try and acknowledge
allegim1ce to K.J. Ori Oikharicvara, to act according to what is
' '
written on the pillar of stone ancl to have no doubt (on the
question of knowledge) whether His Majesty entrusted (a
similar commission) to the descendants of the people of Pas
Khman, because he clid not entrust it to them.
63-67. The people of the lineage of Pas Khmau were
men of violence under all the reigns, up to that2 1 Vral; Karp.sten
Pas Khmau whom His Majesty caused to be condemned. ln the
futnre22 the kings will have to use control over the resources
of the people of Pas Khmuu and merge them w1th the people
of the holy hermitages, His Majesty having no desire to make
total seizure of the property 23 of the people of Pas Khman; in
the futuro, should anyone have knowledge that there are peop1e
20. Regarding mattavarana, see /IJScr, du Cambodac, V, p. 315, n. 3.
21. Daly nel,l, "this particular personage."
22. The interpretation of tyari, "to know," which recurs two
lines further on in a similar formula, is apparently not clear.
23. Passage of doubtful meaning. I take ral in the meaning of
the modern dil, "to spread itself," and I assume that instead of
making total seizure ( 100% c;atagrahar:.a) the king would content
himself with merging them with those of the people from the holy
hermitages.

INSCRIPTIONS OF PRA:ti VIHAR 55
of the lineage of Pas Khrnau of the rank of sanjak, then the ldng
should respectfully be informed; in that eventuality the people
of the holy hermitages who might find themselves under the
patronage of this other lineage (including saiijaks) should
advise their respective families to present their petitions (to the
king ).24
G7 -G8. If S.M. Or! Suryavarmadova has relatives in
'
charge of holy hermitages and in the administration of the
goods .... he does not desire that they should restore the authority
of the people of Pas Khmau.
24. The translation of this passage owes much to the suggestions
of M, Au Chhieng.

56 Jolin Black- Coed~s
Sanskrit Inscription in Nagari Lettering
K . .382
'l'his inscription has been publishell by A. Bergaigne and
A. Barth, 1 who attribute it to the reign of Ya~\ovarman. L. Finot
did the same for tho stele of 'l'a Kev ( K. 534) which is closely
related to it.
Bnt already the publishers of the Insm·,iptions of
Pra~ Vihar hacl noted that from the point of view of the writing,
as well as from grammatical accuracy, the latter showed, by
comparison with the digraphical inscriptions of Yagovarman, a
distinct deterioration.2 On the other hand, Ayrnonier has brought
to our notice that, by putting forward the text to the reign of
Yagovarman, too little space is left for the many generations it
enumerates, the oldest of which do not date back beyond Jayavarman
II. 3 ]~or my part, I have shown that the inscription of
'l'a Kev could harflly be prior to tho reign of Suryavarman J.4
What is certain is that the name of the author of the Sant~krit
inscription, Oivagal

57
TRANSLATION OF TEXT
Order is given to Vra~
Kal!lston Phalapriyal .... theh
Sten CivaQakti , .... on the YaQodharagiri. 2 Concerning tht:l otho1;
god, there has been a command from Oiva , to go anrl erect this
(god) in a place ( anray) at K.J. orr Oikh !ll'lQVHra, bidding
, '
them make the curse upon the command of Oiva. ,
In 969 9aka, tenth clay of the crescent moon of Vai

58 j o)m Blacic""' Coed~s
Khmer Stele of Divakara
K. 883
'l'hii:l inscription has been published in BEFEO, XLIII,
p. 1iH, etc., along with that of Phnorp. Sandal{ ( K. 194, inf?"a,
p. 311 ), of which it is an exact replica. It differs from it only
in the list,; of slaves presented to the temples, in tho boundaries
of the villages which va1·y naturally from one text to the other,
and il~
the presence of two postscripts, the main interest of
which is to show that between 1041 g. ( 1119 A.D.) and 1043 g.
( 1122 A.D.) Divii.kara was promoted by Siiryavarma~ II to the
dignity of dhiili jeri kamraten an.

THE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY
A SUPPLEMENT*
by
G. H. Luce
The basic article under the title above was written before
I was able to complete my searches of the whole o:E the Yuan-shih.
With the following supplementary extracts, mostly taken from
the biographical chapters, I seek to fill the gaps (still, I fear, not
exhaustively) in the record.
Mr. Chen Yee Sein, my invaluable helper, has meantime
ma~1aged to procure a modern edition of the well-known Sung
dynasty treatise, the · Ghu-fan chih, "Record of Various Barbarians,"
1225 A.D., by Chao Jn-kua.348 He has pointed out to
me that here Chiao.chih ·c '!'g1~g:!gng) is said to be bounded on
the west by the Pai-i ("White Clothes"). This suggests to me
I
that the first main door of Dai entry into the Indo-Chinese
peninsula may have been from the northeast (the Kuangsi-Upper
Tongking border) rathe1· .than from the northwest (the Sino­
Burman frontier); that the oldest form o:E the term Pai-i was
"White Clothes" rather than "White Barbarians"; and. that the
suggested origin of the term in late T'ang times (seen. 11 sup1·a),
is provisionally tenable, pending further search in 'l"ang and
Sung sources.
I have assumed hitherto that Hi.1her (op. cit., p. 668, n. 2)
.was right in identifying Lo-pi tien with Mong Hnm state on the
tributary of the Upper Shweli south of Nan-tien-Kan-ai. And
I have assumecl, too, that Lo-pei ( n. 88 ), Lo-pn ( 11.42 ), etc., wel'e
variant forms of the same name. Whether Lo-p'an t1:en oE Extract
(iii) was the same place is much less likely. According to TSFYOY
( cl1. 115, p. 4657 ), Lo-p' an tien was the originnl name of another
(
*The author's basic study under this title was published in the
last issue of this journal, Volume XLVI, Part 2. References in this
supplementary article are made to the basic study, and the enumeration
of the ·notes begun in that study is continued here.

60 G.H. Luce
Lo-pi tien, dependent on Yuan-chiang Road, i.e., in S. (Central).
Yunnan near the Red River. On the southern border hereabouts
was the Pai-i ("White Clothes") Uen of SM-li ( cf. n. 17H ).
The Pai-i were apparently widespread across S. Yi:innan, from'.
east to west. But the term Lo- pi, it seems, was used for more
than one place, so that its application must be determined by the
context.
The Ohu-fan-chih does not appear to mention Hsien. Both
here and in the Sung-shih, 3 49 to the west of Ohtin-la ( Oamboja)
was P'u-kan (Pagan). Twelve (or thirteen) States are listed by .
Chao Jn-Kua as tribut

THE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY 61
Isthmus of Kra, which appears to have been under the control
of Pagan from about lOGO to 1200 A.D.360
Extract (xi), from the biography of the Uignr Ohia-luna-ta-ssu361_
is not this a Sansluit or Pali title, Karu'Y}adarsin?­
contains one of the earliest mentions of Hsien. Tt shows the Emperor
Shih Tsn ( Khnbilai)- probably soon after his :final conquest of
China ( 1279 ), and certainly before 1287- making plans to
conquer, not only I-Isien and Lo-hu, bnt also the Malay Peninsula,
Sumatra, Southern India, and, very likely, Ceylon. Hsing-ha-la­
U-wei 362 I take to be Siinhaladipa, the island of the Lion, i.e.,
Ceylon. There is a section on Ma- tJa-e·rh3 63 in Chapter 210 of
the Yiian-shih, which clearly points, I think, to South India.
1\h'bar, says Professor Nilalnmta Sastri,364 quoting a' contemporary
Muslim chronicler,' "extends in length fl•om Knlam
( Qnilon) to NHawar ( 'Nellore ), " i.e., down the western or
Malabar coast from Qnilon to Cape Comol'in, and up the Ooromandel
coast as far as Nellore. Ohu-lan365 ( Qnilon) is frequently
mentioned in the section of Ma-pa-erh. From 1280, if not earlier,
several sea-missions passed between China and these places,
stopping en route, it seems, in Siam, the Malay Peninsula and
the north of Sumatra. According to our extract, over twenty
kingdoms submitted. In 1286, according to the Section on Mapa-erh,
the following ten kingdoms beyond the sea sent trib·nte:
( i) Ma-pa-erh (including Ohii-lan ), ( ii) Hs1:i-men-na,366 (iii)
Seng-chi-li,367 ( iv) Nan-wn-Ji,368 ( v) Ma-ln.n-tan,369 (vi) Nawang,370
(vii) Ting-lw-erh,3il (viii) Lai-lai,372 ( ix) Ohi-lan-itai,373
( x) Sn-mn-tu-la.374 Su-mu-ta kingdom, also mentioned, is
doubtless a v~riant for Su-mu-tu.-la. Pelliot takes Bsu-mlm-na
to be the same place, Samndra in the northwest of Sumatra,
which has given its name to the island; it was probably foundecl,
he says, about 1250.375 Nan-wu-li, the Lan-wu-li of Chao Jn-kua
and Larnuri of the Naga1·akretugama ( 1365 ), is Marco Polo's
Lambri in Acheh, at the fat· not•th of the island. Na-wang was
somewhere on the route from Chii-lan to China. Ma-lan-tan may
wellbe a misprint for the Chi-lan-tan of Chao Jn-kua, i.e., Kelantan;
and Ting-ko-erh is probably 'l'rengganu.
i.
'

62 G.H. Luce
The Uignrs376 were the most civilized of the Eastern
Turks, much influenced by T'ang Chinese, Manichean, Nestorian,
Buddhist ancl Islamic culture. Karu:J?-aclarsin, like his master
IG{ubilai: was probably a Buddhist, fa~niliar as he was with
Sanslnit, Tibetan, anrl Singhalese. His wise words appear to have
saved these cou.ntries from an Armada invasion, such as wrm1ght
havoc in Champa and Java.
For the rest, the e:dracts translated, which I arrange
roughly in chronologimtl order, simply amplify the story given
above. · It sntfices to add a few comments after each. Transla~
tions of the sections on Mien and Hsien a1·e added (Extracts xvi
and xvii ), for convenience of reference.
Extract ( i ). Biography of HSIN-UHU JJR377 ( Y.8., ch. 166 ).
Hsin-chii Jib was n P'o 3 7 8 man.
He was a 'ruan379 by
.family. His ancestors for generations hacl been kings of Ta-li
kingdom. Latterly they were frequently dethroned by their
powerful ministers of the Kao380 family.
In the year hwi-ch'ou ( 1253 A.D.), during tho reign of
Hsien Tsnn g,381 Shih 'rsu received orders to invade the south.
He executed the minh;ter Kao Hsiang,382 and appointed 'rmm
Hsing-chib.383 to be lord of the affltirs of tho kingdom.
In the year i-mao ( 1255 A.D.), Hsing-chih and his
paternal uncle·· Hsin-ch\1 Fu 3 84 entered the l'resence. 'rhe
Empei~or gave orders bestowing on them the Gold Tally; and
·sent tll.em back to their kingdom.
In the year ping-ch'en ( 1256 A.D.), they submitted to
the Emperor a map of their land, and requested leave to pacify
all the various tribes. At the same time they memorialized,
item by item, the methods of governing the people and fixing
the taxes. I·Isien Tsung was gl'eatly pleased, and bestowed on
Hsiug-ch.ih the name Mo- ho-lo-ts'o385 ( mahu1·a.ia ), and comm~mded
him to be lo1·d of all the various southern barbarians,
.the White Ts'nan and other tribes, anrl appointed. Hsin-chi:i Fu
to command the army. Hsing-chih thereupon delegated his

;fHE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY
government functions to his younger brother, H~in~chii Jih,
while he himself, together with Hsin-chii :Fu, led an al'my . of
20,000 P'o and Ts'uan, to act as vanguard and guide for the
great general Wn-liang-ho-t'ai ( Uriyangqatai ),386-and to punish
and pacify the unsubdued p·al'ts of the various commancleries.
They attacked and conquered Ch1ao-chih387 ( 'rongldng ), nncl
were about to enter the Court when Hsing-chih died on the way.
In the 2nd year of chung-t'ung ( 1261 A~D. ), T-Isin~chi.l
Jih entered the Presence. Shih Tsl\ again bestowed on him the
Tiger •rally, and ordered him to rule 'ra-li, Shan-shan, Wei-ch'n,
T'ung-shih, Hui-ch'uan, Chien-ch'ang, T'eng-yi.ieh388 and other
Cities. All, from the rank of wan-hu downwards, were placed
under his o1•ders.
In the 1st year of chih-yuan ( 1264 A.D.); the Ts'ua:ri'
tribes were pacified. In the thirc} year ( 1266 A.D.), Hsin-chu
Jih entered the Presence. After recording his merits, the
Emperor bestowed on him gold and silver, clothing, a saddle,
reins, and weapo:o.s of war:
In the 11th year ( 1274 A.D.), Sai-tien-ch'ih was appointed
p'ing-chcmg-chenu-shih (Grand Secl"etary) of Yii,nnan
province. He changed and fixed the names and titles of the
various Roads. He appointed Hsin-chii Jih as tS'ung-kuan
( Governor ) of Ta-li.
In the 13th year ( 1276 A.D.), Mien kingdom (Burma)
massed several myriads of elephants and cavalry, anc"J.:;plnndel·ed
Nan-tien of Gold Teeth,389 and sought to take Ta-li by surprise.
'l'he provincial autl:].orities det)pa,tched Hsin-chu Jih, together
wi.th the wan-hu Hu-tu,390 at the head of a thousand cavalry
and soldiers to resist them. Hsin-chii Jib., on .account of his
services, received. appointment as hsuan~fu-shih ( O~mforter ). of.
Ta-li, Meng Hua391 and other places.
In the 18th year (l281.A.D. ), Hsin-chi.i: Jih and his son
A-ch'ing392 again entered the Presence. The Emperor praised
J;ti~ loyalty and· diligence, and promoted him .to be hsiian-wei~shih
(Senior Comforter.) and tu-yuan-sh~~ai (General Commander)

G:.r-r. Luce
of Ta-li, Wei-ch'n, Gold 'l'eeth, and other places. He detainec1
A~ch'ing to serve on the night-bodyguard of the Bastern Palace.
At the farewell audience he again did homage on appointment
as ts'an-ohih~chimg-shih (State Oonnsellor) of the various Roads
and provincial administration of Yii11nan.
In the 19th year ( 1282 A.D.), the Emperor ordered him
to join the yu.ch'eng (Senior A.ssistant~Governor ), Pai-ta~~rh393
( Baidar ), and to go and meet the Yiinnan army for the invasion
of Mien ("Burma). He proceeded as far as Gold Teeth, where
he fell ill and clied.
Hsin-chi:i Jih had ruled 'l'a-li for altogether twenty-three
years. His son, A-ch'ing, inherited his rank and was successively
appointed "Senior General guarding the realm," and
hsuan~wei-sh·ih ( Senior Oornforter ) and tu-yuan-shuai ( General
Ooromander) of 'l'a-li, Gold 'feeth and other places.
Comment. For Hsin~chii Jih, see notes 22, 57. This scion
of the 'ruan line of Nan-chao rulers was a P'o ( n. 27 ). 'rhe
word, P'o, does not occut· in the lrlan-shu. Whether tho P'o-i
(P'o barbarians) were really Pai-i, i.e., Shans, I am inclined to
doubt. Their centt·e was northeast of the Shan area, and nearer
to 'l'a~li. 'fhey were also called 'Blacl' Ts'nan.' According to
the Man~shu ( ch. 4 ), "the Western Ts'nan are the White Man,
the Eastern Ts'uan are the Black Man." 'l'he P'o should therefore
be the latter, the Eastern Ts'uan, who originally were
south, rather than east, of the former. In chapter 8 of the
Man-shu, six words (meaning, Oity, Bamboo, Salt, Earth, to
A.sk for, Sour) are given in the language of the Eastern Ts'uan;
only one of these, Salt394 ( chu-kuiw), looks at all like Shan. The
P'o, as distinct from the Pai-i, threw in their lot with the
Mongols from the first; and, like the Ts'uan, Lolo and Ho-ni,
they a1•e frequently mentioned as recruits in the local Mongol
armies.
Extract ( ii ). Biographies of HSI-U -OH'IEN-PU and AI-LU395
( Y.S., ch. 122 ).
Hsi-li-ch'ien-pu was a man of T'ang-wu396 ( 'l'angnt) .. ,.
(Goes on expedition against Russia. and wins the title Bahadur ),

i.'HE EARLY SYA~1 IN BURMA'S HISTORY
In chi-wei year ( 1259 A.D. ),397 Shih 'l'su in-vaded the
South. Ilsi.:.li~ch'ien~pu had to find and furnish the commissariat
for the army. 'rhere was never any lack or stoppage. On account
of sickness he returned in a sedan chair and died at home-, aged
6 9, His son was Ai.:.lu.
Ai•ln inherited the post o£ dwruoac'i of 'lia-ming Roacl.398
In the 5tb year of chih-y,iian (12(i8 A.D.), he followed the Yunnan
expedition to the various tribes of Gold Teeth. SontheJ'il
barbarian ttoops, ten thonsand ln numbe1·, had cut the P'iuo~
tien 399 road. He attacked them and cut off over a thousand
heads. This so frightened the various tribes that they submitted.
In the Gth year ( 12ti9 A.D.), he again entered (the
region) and fixed their rents and land-tax. I-Ie pacified twenty.
four stockades, including Hno~pu-ma.400 He got seven tame
elephants and returned.
In the 7th year ( 1270 A.D.), he was transferred to be
da?·ugaci of Olnmg-ch'ing Road,401 with the combined office of
Oo11troller of 'l's'nan and P'o troops.
In the lOth year ( 1~73 A.D.), the p'ing.chano (Grand
Secretary), Sai-tien-ch'ih, became Governor of Yi1nnan province.
He ordered Ai-lu to demarcate the boundaries of Yung-ch'ang.402
'l'he increase in cultivated fields was greatest here ....
When Prince Hsiang.wu-erh,403 at the head of various
generals, in-vaded JVIien, Ai-lu supplied the connnissariat ttlHl
rations. There was never any lack or stoppage ....
and died.
In the 25th year ( 1288 A.D.), he fell ill with malaria
Comment. 'l'he Tangnt,404 of the kingdom of Hsi-hsia. in
Kansu and Ordos, were a Lolo-spe

66 d.:H:. :Luce
in 1:2RR, he "fought 38 battles and cut off innumerable heads;;
of Lolo and Pai-i.
On the Burma border, during 1:2li8-9, he
opened the Nttrn Kham route: H·uO-JYU-ma of the text is surely a
misprint for T'£en- pu-ma ( n. 52).
Extract (iii) Biographies of 8A.l-TIEN-OH'JH,405 and his sons
NA-SU-LA-T.lNG406 and HU-HSJN407 (cl!.l25) .
. . . . Lo-p'an tien408 rebelled; and Sai-tien-ch'ih went on
expedition there.
He wore a sorrowful look, and his followers
asl,ed him why. He said: ''I am not sad :tt going out on expedition,
I am sad about you people risking your 1i ves among spearpoints
and barbs of arrows, lest unfortunately and quite guiltlessly
yon may die.
And I am sad also for fear yon people may
rob or plunder ordinary persons, leaving them nothing to live
on; a,nd so the people will revolt, with the result that we shall
have to send 1mother expedition against them."
'l'he m•my halted at Lo-p'an city, which for three days
refused to submit. 'l'hc various generals asked leave to attack it.
Sai-tien-ch'ih would not allow them.
(the city), with reasons. 'l'he lord of Lo~p'an
said: "I respectfnlly
accept your commands."
He sent en voye to notify
Three days passed, but still it
did not submit. 'l'he various generals were an eager to fight, and
asked leave to advance to the attack.
Sai-tien-ch'ih again
refused. Suddenly, among the generals and the men, the1•e were
some who mounted the city-wall and were proceeding to attack.
Sai-tien-ch'ih was very angry, and urgently sounded the metal
(gong) aud stopped them. He summoned the wan-hu, and loudly
blamed hi~1 saying: "'l'he Sou of Heaven has commanded me to
pacify and comfort Yunnan. He has never commanded me to kill
and slaughter.
Without the r>J'dcrs of your commanding officer,
to take it upon yomself to attack, according to military law is
punisha.ble with death." And he ordered his attendants to bind
him. 'l'he other generals kowtowed and begged him to wait till
the day of the city's submission, and then take action.

THE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY
When the lord of Lo-p'an heard of this, he said: "Fancy
the p'ing-chang being so magnanimous and kind! If I resist hi's
orrlcrs, it will be unlnc]

68 G.H. Luce
It happened that his father, Shan~ssn~ting,412 died. 'l'ho
ministers of Yiinnan province, in dealing with the various
barbarians, had lost his knack of soothing and calming them.
Shih Tsu was anxious about this. The ministers near the
throne recommended Na-su~la-ting ....
In the 29th year ( 1292 A.D.) he fell ill and died ....
HU-HSIN
.... In the 5th year of ta-t& ( 1301 A.D.), the lord of
Mien kingdom, relying on the strength of his defences, refused
to submit. Hu-hsin sent persons to notify him saying: "I am
a son of the old Sai-t.ien-ch'i h, the p'1:ng-chang (Grand Se>cretal'y ).
I am only following the instructions of rny predecessor. If any
officials in charge in your country act improperly, they must all
be clutngod for your own sakes." When the lord of Mien
kingdom heard this, he the1•enpon came along with the envoy
and offered as tribute one white· elephant. Moreover he said:
"This (sort of) elephant, hom of old till now, has never been
hnd. Only now the sacred virtue (of the Emperor) has caused
it to appear. I venture (to submit it) as a ldnd of local
product." When it was submitted at Oourt, the Emperor bestowed
on the lord of Mien kingdom the title of Heir to the Throne ....
[Hu-hsin died in the 1st month (Jan. iHst-Mar. 1st), li\10.]
Comment. 'fhis passage is of interest because it shows
the methods of a firm pacifist living in a gl'im age of war and
massacre. For the six years (1274-79) of Sayyicl Ajall's governorship,
this "Sun of the Faith" (Islam) kept Yi-innan and its frontiers
peaceful and quiet, with gain rather than loss to Khubilai's
prestige.
For his eldest son, Nasir eel-Din, see n. 62, and the fuller
and better-dated account in the text. This first Mongol invasion
of Burma occurred in 1277-78, but the report only reached the
capital in 1279. The dating and recording of events in the biographical
chapters is often not as careful as in the pen-chi. Thus,
the sending of the white elephant is hc1'e dated 1301, that is, it

THE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY 69
was dono after the siege of Myinzaing, The pen-chi ( n. 263) dates
it May 1st, 1300. It was a supreme effort to avert the coming
invasion; and the "bestowing on the lord of Mien kingdom of
the title .Heir to the Throne" ( n. 262, .June 22nd 1300) refers,
of course, to Kumarakassapa, not to AssankhayiL
Extract ( iv ). Biography of YEH-HAN-1'I-CHJN413 ( ch. 133 ).
Yeh-han-ti-chin was a Hsia-la-lu414 man ....
In the 21st year ( 1284 A.D.) he, and the yze.ch'eng (Senior
Assistant-Governor) T'ai-pu,415 and Prince Hsiang.wu-ta-erh,416
by different routes invaded Mien. He constructed boats on the
two rive1·s A-hsi and A-ho,417 as many as 200 craft. He advanced
and attacked Chiang-t'ou ('Riverhead') city,418 and captured it.
He took prisoner 10,000 of its keenest soldiers. He ordered the
General Conunancle1· ( tu-yuan-slntai ), Lai Shih-an,419 to garrison
it. Moreover he mapped the physical features of the land, and
sent messengers to go to the Gate of the Court and furnish a
report on the proper way to attack and garrison it.
Previously, after the conquest of Ohiang-t'ou city, he had
sent Hei-ti-erh and Yang Lin,420 etc., to notify (the ldng of)
Mien and cause him to submit. There was no reply. But the
various rebel southern barbarians were relying on T'ai-lnmg
city of the Chien-tu421 in 01·der to resist our main army. Again
he sent Budclhist monks to warn them of the consequences, good
or evil, of tb eir actions, bnt they were murdered. Thereupon
he dil·ected his army to advance both by water and land, and
captured (the city) by storm. Twelve walled towns of the
Chien-tu, Gold Teeth, etc., all submitted. He ordered the General
Commander Ho-tai, and the wan-htt Pu-tu-man, 422 etc., to take
5,000 troops and garrison them.
In the 28th ye~u ( 1291 A.D.), he was transferred to be
Assistant Delegate of the provincial War Office of Ssi'ich'uan,
where he died ....
Comment. For Yagan.tegin, see n. 76 and the text. He
w~s a prince ( tegin) of the Hsia-la-lu or Qarlnq, 423 the chief

70 G.H. Luce
tt•ibe of the Western ~rurks who lived originally, west of the
Uignrs, in the 'l'arbagatai mountains, east of Lake Ballmsh.
This main invasion of Burma was in the cold season of
1283-84. The general 1e.ft to garrison Chiang-t'ou ( Kanugzin) is
here ca1lec1 TAti Shih-an, in the Section on Mien Hsi.ian Shih-an,
in Huber's text Yi:ian Shih-an.424
Extract ( v ).
Biography of OHANG-vV.A .. N-CHIA-NU and son
PAO-T'UNG425 ( Y.8., ch. 165 ).
In the 20th year ( 1283 A.D.), Chang-wan-ehin-nn accompanied
the expedition to Mien and died fighting. 'l'he Prince of
Yunnan ordered his son, Pao-t'nng, to lead his troops and
accompany the expedition. He entered T'ai-kung city.42 6 As a
reward for his services, he inheritecl the post of Assistant General
Commander (fu .. ttt-Y'Uan-shttai ). Again he accompanied the
expedition to Shan-tan of Kan-chou, 427 and also died :fighting ....
Extract (vi). Biography of YEH-LU-T'U-HUA and his greatgrandson
MANG-f{[l .. 'I'AJ4 2 8 ( Y.S., ch. H9 ).
Yeh-lli-t'u .. hna was a Ch'i-tan429 man .... His son Olw­
Ko430 succeeded him .... His son Pao T'ung-131 succeeded him ....
Mang-lm-tai was son of Pao .. t'ung. In the time of Shih 'l'su he
was granted the Gold ,'l'ally and inherited his father's rank ....
On account of his services he was promoted wan .. lm,. He accompanied
the expedition against Lo-pi Uen. 43 2 On reaching Yunnan,
he was ordered by the Emperor to take his :force :mel enter Mien,
and go and meet the Prince of Yiinnan. The Gold Teeth, Pai-i
('White Clothes'), Ta.pen,433 and other southern barbarians
repeatedly ambushed him at vital strategic points, and lay in
wait for him. Mang-kn-tai vigorously attacked and broke them.
After more than ten fights altogether, he reached the Mien
border and opened the Gold Teeth Road. He received the Prince,
and so returned. He -\vas promoted to be Assistant General
Commander. He accompanied Prince A-t'ai433 on his expedition
against Olliao.chih.... Again he accompanied the Prince of
Yi.i.nmm in attacking Lo-pi tien and conquered it.

1 I'HE EARLY SYAM IN BURJ\Il:A'S HISTORY
In the 29th year ( 1292 A.D.) he entered the Presence ... ,
( ln 1294 ..A.D.) he was promoted to be Senior Comforter ( hsuanwei-shih)
and General Commander of 'I' a-li, Gold 'l'eeth nnd other
places ....
Oomment. Yeh-lu was the royal clan of the Ch'i-tan
Ta1•tars ( Khitili, Cathay ).435 They lived originally in S.E. Mon.
golia, and spoke a palatalized Mongol tongue. 'l'hey conquered
S. Manchuria ( Liao.tnng) and N. China, founding the Liao
dynasty (fl. 907-1123 ). Driven thence by the Jncen Tun gus,
some of them founded a new empire of the Qarakhitai ('Black
Khitai') in 'l'urkestan, which lasted till it was conquered by
Gengis in 1211.
'l'he first Lo-pi lien campaign mentioned in this extract
perhaps took place in 1287-88, when Prince As'an Tamiir, grandson
of Khubilai (see n. 108 ), fought his way to Pagan, "losing over
7000 men of his army." l\1ang-1m-tai, I take it, was sent to
extricate him, The Mang-lcu-tai of this extract is clearly the
Meng-ku-tai of Extract VII, where the invttsion of J_,o.pi tien
appears to fall in or after 1284. It precedes Prince A-t'ai's
expedition to Tongking: I am not sure of the date of this.
Extract (vii). Biography of PU-LU-HO-T.A.436 ( Y.S., ch. 132 ).
Pu-lu-ho-ta was a Mongol of the Hnng-chi-la437 clan ....
In the 21st year ( 1284: A.D.) he was ordered to commanc1
a thousand Mongol and T'au-ma-ch'ih438 troops and accompany
the expedition against the southern barbarians of Gold 'l'eeth. He
pacified them. When the General Commander ( tu.yuan-shuai)
Meng-ku-tai439 invaded Lo-pi tien, Pu-lu-ho-ta led guerilla troops
and went ahead. The water in the river suddenly rose in flood.
He lecl his men swimming through the water and forded it. At
a point 300 yards from the city-wall, he encamped. He stayed
there for seven days. When the who1e army assembled under the
wal.1s of the city, and advanced to attack it, Pu-lu-ho-ta was the
firs.t to mouut the walls and capture the city; whereupon there
was a massacre.

Again he accompanied the expedition against Pa-pai-hsi-hi
ldngdorn, and reached Oh'8-li. 4 4° Oh'e-li is the residence of the
chieftain. Prince K'uo-k'uo 441 ordered Pu-lu-ho-ta to lend 300
guerilla cavalry and to go and summon them to submi.t. 'l'hey
refused; so he made his troops advance and attack them. 'l'he
tu-ch~n·fu Hon OheDg 4 42 was killed. Pu~lu-ho-ta demolished the
woodwork of their northern gate; whereupon he entered their
stoclmde. Their land was wholly pacified. 'l'he emperor bestowed
on him the Gold Tiger Tally a11d appointed him 'Great General
cherishing the J!'ar,' and da1·ugaci of the wan-hu office of Yi.iunan.
When he died, his son Mang-ku-rm-hua 443 inherited his post ....
Comment. PL1-lu-ho-ta belonged to the Hung-chi-la, i.e.,
Qongirat or Ongirat444 tribe, here described as Mongol. They
lived 011 the east bank of the Argnn River in ·the northeast of
Mongolia, west of the Khingan mountains.
The first expedition against Pa-pai-hsi-fu ( n. 179) was
in 1292-3, nnJ.er Miingi:i 'l'i:iriimish. Great Oh'e-li must have
submitted before the end of 129G, when a governorship was set
up there ( n. 185 ). I do not know which of ·~he expeditions
was commanded by Prince K'uo-k'no.
Extract (viii). Section on the ARlYIY. "Army regulations"
( ping-chih -Y.S., ch. 98 ).
15th year ( 1278 A.D.) .... Yi:innan province reported:
"Of the old 1\1ongol troops who wore stationed as colonists in
Yunnan, very few are left. So we have to take gradually, as
they reach manhood, young recruits, a lot of timid and nervous
soldiers (? ), and prepare them for service Etbroad. Yi:innan is
vast and far, and there are lots of places still unsubdued. The
use of troops is certainly necessary. We have already enlisted
10,000 Ts'11an and P'o445 men as soldiers. And we are continually
taking newly-submitted Lo-lo, Ho-ni446 and other persons,
and also causing them to fill gaps in our army. But these men
are not like those of Central China. If they go on expedition
to other regions, they are sure to desert and hide. It would be

THE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY 73
best to Ol'der them to be employed only against places nnt yet
subdued in the immediate neighbourhood of the places where
each nf theru live .... "
Comment. Compare the entry in the pen-cM,447 under date
April 2Gth, 1278: "The Emperor issued orders that in view
of the fact that the bo1·der-lands of Yi:tnnan are vast and fal',
and that there are sti1l many who have not yet submitted, hf'
authorized the sending of 10,000 men on punitive expeditions."
Extrnct ( ix ). Section on the ARMY. "Frontier Defc·nec"
( ch~n-shu- Y.S., ch. 99 ).
In the 21st year (1284 A.D.) .... lOth month (Nov.
9th-Dec. 7th). Reinforcements were sent to garrison and gn:trd
Gold. 'l'eeth kingdom. It was because· the people of that region
arc stubborn and truculent. :B'ormerly Chinese troops and newly
submitted troops, i3000 men, were the frontier guards. Now, ill
ad

74 G.H. Luce
In the 15th year ( 1277 A.D.), he was given tite special
task of gove1•ning 'l'a-li. It happened that the people of Mien
made a raid across the frontier. Ch'ieh-lieh at once supplied
the army with wettpons of war, and punished and pacified (the
invaders). He was granted appointment as Second Secretary
to the Left and Right Offices of the pt·ovincial Boards.
In the 18th year ( 1281 A.D.), the p'ing-clwng (Grand
Secretary), Na-Sl1-la-ting, sent him to the imperial Gate to
memorialize the 'l'hrone about frontier affairs. Shih 'l'su liked
his quickness and discrimination, his skill and experience. He
bestowed on him the 'l'iger 'l'ally, and granted him appointment
as darugaci of the Comfortership (hsuan-fu-ssu) of Chen-hsi,
Mien (for P'ing-mien ), Ln-ch'uan and other Roads,452 with the
combined office of lcuan-chtm-chao-t' ao-shih 453 (' disciplinary
officet· directing the army').
The various posting-stntions of Ch'eng-tn and Wu-meng454
had their communications blocked and cut off. Ch'ieh-1ieh
bought horses and supplied couriers, to the great convenience
of travellers. Just at this moment he was summoned to go np
to the capital, and questioned about the arrangements necessary
for the invasion of Mien. His replies made in audience suited
the Emperor, who bestowed on him silks and a coat of mail
with feather.
When Prince Hsiang-wn-ta-erh and the Y'U-ch'eng (Senior
Assistant-Governor) T'ai-pu invaded Mien, they ordered Ch'-ieh-
1ieh to take war-bunts and lead the way. They captured Chiangt'ou
('Riverhead') city, ancl led their army back home,
Again, he followed the Prince of Yunnan when he
entered Mien. He commanded 3000 soldiers and encamped and
guarded P'iao kingdom.4 55 He fixed the strategy of the campaign,
and snmmoTJed and encouraged the adherents (of Mien
to return). From this time those who returned to their normal
occupations were rnauy.
Afterwards he entered the Presence, and Shih Tsu
comfo1·ted and l'ew!ndecl him, and enquired all about Mien ldng.

THE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY 75
dom. He was selected to receive the title Oheng-i-ta-ftt ('Upright
Counsellor') and General Secretary to the provincial administration
of Mien-cbnng4 5 6 ('Central Burma'), wearing at the waist
the Gold Tally. The Emperor made proclamation to Mien,
pnblishirJg and making lmown his own majesty and virtue. The
king of Mien bowed down his forehead to the ground, and
pronounced his thanks (for the favour shown him). He sent
his son and heir, Hsin-ho-pa-ti, to ente1· the> Court with tribute.
Oh'ieh-lieh was promoted t'ung-feng-ta-fu457 and ts'anchih-cheng-shih
(State Counsellor) to the provincial administration
of the various Roads of Yi.innan. He rose to be tzu-shanta-fu,458
('Helper of the good') and tso-ch'eno (Junior Assistant­
Governor) of the provincial administmtion of the various Ronds
of Yi.innan.
died.
In the 4th year of ta-te ( 1300 A.D.), he fell il1 and
Comment. For Ch'ieh-lieh (the Kariiit ), see notes 99,
234, and the text. Sayyid Ajall ( Sai-tien-ch'i h) was in charge
in Shensi and Sst1-ch'uan from 1264 to 1274. The "Caves"
were in S.E. Yiinnan, on the Ohiao-chih ( Tongl

76 G.H. Luce
Hun-ti ( n. 233)- was Ch'ieh-lioh also present?- took place
later in the same year; and Klawcwa,'s dethronement, according
to Bmmese sources ( n. 243 ), about the end of the year ( lHth
wnxing of Pyatho ). Singhapati's second mission to Peldng
( n. 248) is dated Al1rill3th, 1299; the murder of him and hi;;
father ( n. 250) May lOth, 1299.
Extract (xi).
Biogl'tlphy of 0HJA.LU-NA-TA-SSU459 ( Y.S. ch.
134 ).
Chia-ln-na-ta-ssu WitS a Wei-wu-crh4 60 ( Uignr) man. He
was well-ve1·Sed in the religions of India and the languages of
various kingdoms. He was a Reader in the Han-lin Academy ....
(Summoned to Comt by the Emperor Shih 'l'sn, he studies
under the Hsi-fan, i.e., Tibetan, Rajagnrn ('Phags-pa?), and within
one year masters Tibetan. He then translates the Indian ancl
Tibetan sutras ancl shastt·as into Uignr.)
A small kingdom of the south-west, Hsing-ha.ll\.ti-wei.461
with more than twenty tribes, came to Court. Chia.ln-lHt-ta.ssu,
in the presence of the Emperor, presented ancl road out their
memorirt1s to the Throne. The val'ious kingdoms were awestruck
and submitted.
The Court was deliberating on the starting of military
operations to punish Hsien kingdom, Lo-hn, Mrt-pa-&rh, Chii.lan,
Sn-mn-tu.la,462 and other kingdoms. Chia-lu-na-ta-ssl:i memorialized
saying: "These are all unimportant petty ldngdoms. Even if
we get them, whrtt is the profit? To start military operntions
merely dest1~oys human lives. Would it not be better to S

THE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY 77
Ch'eng Tsung came to the Throne (in 1294 A.D.), "he remembered
his loyalty, ... pitied his old i1ge, and gave orders allowing
him to enter the Palace-grounds riding in a cart. When Jen
Tsung465 came to the Throne" (in lBll A.D.), and there was a
general discharge of superfluous officials, "only Chia-ln-na-ta-ssu
held his post as Minister of Instruction/66~[\;s b4ore ....
"The Empe1·or bestowed on him~ jacle sad~le.
I "
year, 8th month, he died." "', "/
In the same
Extract ( xii ). Biography of LIU GHENG467 ( Y.S., ch. 176 ):
.... In the 1st yem· of ta-te ( 1297 A.D.) Lin Cheng was
transferred to be Secretary of the War Office (t'ung-ch'1:en.shu-miyiian-shih
).468 Soon after, he was sent out as tso.ch'eng (Junior
Assistant-Governor) of the provincial government of Yi.innan.
The yu-ch'~ng (Senior Assistant-Govel·nor ), Mang-wu-t.'n-ln-mishih,469
requested leave to mn.ke an expedition against Mien.
(Lin) regarded it as not possible. Suddenly (came o1·de1'S for) a
general levy. Once more, with the utmost emphasis, he declared
that it was impossible. The Emperor did not agree. The campaign
finally proved a failure ....
Oomment. For Mangi.i. Tiiriimish, see n. 194. It was in the
8th month of 1299 (see Huber's text, p. 67H-4) that Kmnarakassapa
escaped to Yi.innan, and Mangi:i Ti1ri:imish espoused his cause.
See the text.
Extract ( xiii ). Biography of HA-LA-1'A[470 ( Y.S., ch. 132 ).
Ha-1a-tai was of the Ha-ln471 clan ....
In the 5th year of ta-t'e ( 1301 A.D.) he was commancled to
enter the Presence, ancl selected for appointment as tzu-te-ta-fu472
("great man relying on virtue") nnd yu,.ch'eng (Senior Assi.stan t­
Governor) of Yiinnan province (with orders), to accompany Lin
Sh8n47 3 on expedition against Pa-rmi-hsi-fu474 kingdom.
In the 1st year of chih-shun
Snng-lnng-cbi475 and others rebelled.
returned. (Lin) Shen was executecl.
~nilty and clismissecl.
( 1330 A.D.- a mistake),
He lost his army and
Ha-la-tai also was found

78 G.H. Luce
In the 11th year (of ta.tiJ? 1307 A.D.), he fell ill and
died at Jn.chou 47 6 •...
In the 1st yeat· of huang-ch'ing ( 1312 A.D.), the Empe1·or
conferred on him the posthumous titles of ....
Comment. For Ha-la-tai ( Qaratai ), see notes 299, 307. He
was a Qarlnq ( Ha.lu = Ha.la-lu = Hsia-la-lu, etc.). He appears to
have been vindicated after his death. The elate, 1st year of
chih-shun ( 1330 A.D.), is an obvious mistake. Sung Lung-chi's
rebellion is first mentioned in the pen.chi under date June 30th,
1301 :477 "The native official of Yiinnan, Sung Lung-chi, rebelled.
At this time Lin Shen was leading his army from Shnn-yi.ian478
to enter Yi:innan. 'rhe yu.ch'lmrJ (Senior Assistant-Governor) of
Yiinnan, Yiieh Hu.nan, 4 7 9 was moving the population to supply
the commissariat. Sung Lung-chi tool{ advantage of this to deceive
his people saying, 'The government army's levying and despatching
of yon people, means that they will cut off nll your hair
and brand your faces. They will make yon soldiers, and yon will
die yourselves, either on the march or on the battlefield.' All
were misled by his words and so rebelled." Under date February
li5th, 1304,480 we read: "In view of the fact that the sub-prefect
and Acting Comforter of Shun-yi.ian of Y1innan, Sung A-chung,4Bl
had captured alive his father's younger brother, (Sung) Lung-chi,
and come and surrendered him, the Emperor specially promoted
him in office and bestowed on him a snit of clothes." And further
rewards, under elate .June 21st, 1304,4 8 2 were given to the higher
officials, from Prince T'o-t'o-i.c)li-li483 downwards, ''for their
merits in pacifying Sung Lung-chi."
Extract ( xiv ).
Biography of OH' EN T'IEN-HSIANG, younger
brother of OH'EN HU484 ( Y.S., ch. 168 ) .
. . . . In the 6th year of ta.te (1302 A.D.), Oh'Gn T'ien-hsiang
was promoted hs1:no-t'ai (Viceroy?) of Honan and President of
the Oenso1•ate ( yu-shih-ch'ung-ch'en(! ). 4 85 He memorialized the
Emperor on the subject of the expedition to the southwest bar.
barians, saying :

THE EARLy SYIM1 IN BURMA•S HISTORY 79
"rrhere are wars which cannot possibly be stopped. Thel·e
are also wars which can be stopped, and are not stopped. If only
we can stop them, and in fact do stop them, we can maintain om
military strength for ever. 'l'o make military preparations for
use in wars which cannot possibly be stopped, this may be called
goocl war strategy. Last year the. provincia,! yu-ch'eng (Senior
Assistant-Governor), Lin Shen, went on a distant expedition
against Pa-pai-hsi-fu. 'l'his was a war which could have been
stopped, and \vas not stopped. It is a small country in the frontierwilds,
far away in the southwest of Yunnan. And it is several
thousand Zi (in area). It is a mean rustic place, of no use whatever.
The people are all obstinate, stupid and ignorant. If we get
the land, it can hardly be counted as an asset. If we fail to get
it, it can hardly be regarded as a loss.
"Lin Shen cheated his superiors aud deceived his subordinates.
He led troops only to slaughter t!Jem. On his way tlHough
Pa.fan,486 he gave free rein to his perversity and licentiousness.
Relying on his majesty and strength, he cruelly oppressed the
inhabitants. While he was still on the road, rebellion broke out.
Everywhere they all revolted. When he was unable to suppress
the rebellion, he himself in turn was suppressed by the rebel
masses. In the army there was shortage of rations. The men had
to eat each other. He was at his wits' end, all in a flurry and
dither ; so he retreated and fled. 'rhe local troops pursued and
attacked, resulting in a great defeat. ( Liu) Shen abandoned his
men and fled. He barely escaped himself. Of the army nine men
out of ten perished. Over a thousand ti of territory was abandoned.
"The Court is now once more despatching various armies
of the four provinces of Shensi, Honan, Kiangsi and Hnknang,
and has made Lin Erh-pa487 the commander-in-chief, with the
intention of recovering thE' revolted territory. In Hnpeh and
Hunan there has been a big levy of adult male labourers to
transport army-rations for delivery at Po-chon.488 The regular
labourers, together with those who carry on their backs their
own rations, are estimated at over 200,000 altogether .... "

cU:r. tuce
( 'l'he writer mentions the injury to ral'ming; the risk of
the rations not arriving at their destination; the difficulties
of the terrain~steep mountains, dense forest, thorny bamboo,
constant drmger of ambush, malaria and famine).
''Moreover, since we started expeditions against Japan
("Kingdom of Dwarfs"), Oh an-ch'ong ( Champa), Ohino-chih
( 'l~ongldng ), Ohao-wa489 (.Java), and Mien ldngdom (Burma),
down to the present day, nearly 30 years have passed; and we
have not seen the gain of a foot of territory, or a single person
added to those subject to China. And when one reckons the
money and wealth wasted, and the number of soldiers killed or
wounded- alas, how can they be counted t
"Last year there was the western expedition. And now
there is this one starting. Here again, what is the difference
between them? The mirror-warning of the past is not far off;
nor is it difficult to see.
"Our troops are wea1·y, our people disturbed. 'l'hey see
as yet no date for resting. (Lin) Shen alone is the one man who
is the cause of this disaster. Again, one hears that the people
of Pa-fan-lo kingdom have already been troubled ancl injured
by the army of the western expedition. 'l'hey have abandoned
theh occupations for a livelihood, run away in a body, and
rebelled. 'rheir grievance against (Lin) Shen has entered into
their bones and marrow. 'l'hey all want to get his flesh and divide
and eat it. They all hate him. And Heaven's Will also abhors
him. The (Emperor's) duty, above, is just to bear the Will of
Heaven; below, it is to comply with the hearts of men; to be quick
and correct the crimes of (Lin) Shen; and, next, to send clown a
clear imperial edict .... "
There was no reply (from the Emperor).
Oomment. Oh'en 'l"ien-hsiang's memorial, though marked
by the usual Chinese contempt for the 'Southwest barbarians,' is
a fitting comment on the futility of all these Mongol wars. And if
they did small good t.o the Mongols, they were disastrous to the
victims of their aggression. They ruined the Lolo-Dai kingdom

;.i'IIE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY
br Nan-elwn. 'l'hoy ruined the Burmese kingdom of Pagan. They
nearly ::;tilled the 'l'hai kingdoms of Chier 1 g ·un 1· t · t\ ·
ln'" ' 0 c., Ill lE'll'
cradles. A1Hl they left a lmd ti"1clr'tic1 11 of a ·
L , ggressron and
insecnrity.
"'l'hP wester11 expedition" apparently iucans T...in Sheu's
cmnpaigu.
Extract ( xv ). Section on the ABMY. "]'ron tiel· JlefeilCi:' ,;
( chen-slru-Y.8., ch. 99 ).
4th year of chih-ta of Wu Tsung,490 12th mcmth (.Jnn,
9th-Feb. 7th, 1 :n 2 ). Yi.innan Pa-pai-hsi-fu, Great and Littln
011, ~ lr' 491 L.• , etc ., were · · c l omg · illJSe · l ue · f . Tl 1e E mperor (wanted to)
transfer Mongol mtd Chinese troops of Sst1Ch'uan province, 4000
men, mHl ordered the wan-hn, Nang-chia-tai,492 to take tlwm
uu

~2 G.I-I. Luce

TilE EARLy SYMJ IN BURMA'S HISTORY 83
my father A-lli, le1l au army of "OVGl"'li·ny1·1·,lcls t · d
N " •·· 01nva e us, and
eaptnrel1 mv • father A-pi and departed · ' • 'l'l 1 e 1·o · was no ·tl' ung f or 1t ·
hnt t(\ IHLY a heavy ranson to that kingdom, and so obtain his
roh•ase. I theref(\re regard the people of the Mien.ohung (Central
Bnrma) tribe as a mere pack of dogs. At present Mien has sent
A-ti.pa and others, nh1e pe1·sons, to go and spy out the reactions
of his pPoph•. 'l'he prc•sent chieftain of tho Pai-i ('White Clothes')
i.s a rl'lative hy marriage ( ch'in-ch'i) of A-lmo, and is neighbour
to 1\Iien. HP has ~tated that to enter Mien there are three roads:
OlJO hy 'J"icm-pu-ma, one by l)'iao.tien, and one by the borders of
A-kuo'H lund. All meet at Ohiang.t'ou ('Riverhead') city of J\Iien.
Again n relative; by marriage of A-lmo, A-ti-fan, is in Mien,
holcling livu native districts (tien), each with over ten thousand
1HJUSf'llOhls. He wishes to submit to China. A-kno wants first to
call A-t'i-ftm and those of the Gold Teeth who have not yet subrnittecl,
so as to make them lead the way."
Yiimum province thereupon reported: "'l'he king of :Mien
r ofust'H to sulnni t. 'l'he envoys who departed have not returned.
We rmtHt certainly malm a punitive expedition."
l11 the (ith month ( Jnne 25th.Jn1y 24th, 127[) ), the War
om Cll ( sltu.-mi-ttii(W.) informed the Emperor; but he said it would
he hettur to wnit a while.
In the 11th month (Nov. 19th-Dec. 18th, 1275 ), Yiinnan
province first rt•pnrted that it had despatched persons to watch
anr1 HIJY nut news of the ambassadors, but tho P'u rebels blocked
tho way. Now the P'n had mostly submitted, and the road was
nh·l•nrly open. 'l'hoy hncl sent the Governor ( tsung-lc'ttan) of
Kan-e of Gold 'l'eeth, A-ho, who had found out that the ambas-
8aclors hnrl till reached Mien safely.
In the 14th year, ihd month ( Apri.l 5th-Mny 4th, 1277 ),
the people of Mien, bearing a g1•ndge against A.ho for his submission
to China, attacln~cl his land and sought to St't up stockades
between 'l"eng.yiieh !l.llcl Yung-ch'ang. At this time Fln-tu, Mongol
ch' 1
:en-lm of 'l'n-li Road, and Hsin-chii Jih, Governor of Ta-1i Road,
tl.nd T'o-lo-t'o-hai, tsung-;pa and ch'ien-hu, had 1'cceived imlJl'rinl

84 G.H. Luce
orders to chastise the yet unsubdued tribes and clans, P'n, P'iao,
A-ch'ang anu Gold Teeth, of 'r'eng-yi:i.eh, west of Yung-ch'ang,
and to station themselves at Nan-tien. A-ho sent them an urgent
message. Hn-tn and the rest marched by day and night and met
the Mien army by the side of a river. They were a host of forty
or fifty thousand men, 800 elephants, and 10,000 horses. The
army of Hu-tu and the rest was barely 700 men. 'l'he men of
Mien lecl first with the cavalry, next with the elephants, next
with the infantry. The elephants wore coats of mail, and bore
on their backs fighting-howdahs. On both sides they carried big
bamboo tubes, furnished with several tens of short spears. The
riders on tho elephants would take these out;, and use them to
strike and pierce.
Hn-tu i~sued the following o1·clers: "The rebels are many.
We are few. We must first charge the army north of the river.
I myself will lead 281 horsemen, forming one company. Hsin-chu
Jih, with 233 horsemen, will be a1ongside the river, forming one
company. 'l"o-lo-t'o.hai, with 187 men, will rest on the mountain,
forming one company." Aftel' a. long hand-to-hand fight the rebeh;
were defeated and they fled. Hsin-cht-i Jih pursued them three
li, and reached the gate of the stockade, but got involved in the
mud ancl retired. Suddenly, from the southern side, over 10,000
rebel troops made a circuit and ca.rne out at the back of our army.
Hsin-chu Jih rode full-speed and informed Hn.tu. Once more he
formecl the three companies into line, and advanced up to tho
river-bank and attacked them. Again they were defeated aud
fled. He pursued, and c~tpturecl their 17 stockades, and cl!'ove
them north as far as a narrow mountain mouth, returning to the
charge and. fighting over 30 li. The rebels ancl the elephants and
the horses trampled on each other.
Their dead filled. three big
clitches. In the evening Hu-tu was wounded, and then he collected
his troops. On the following clay he pursued the enemy as far as
Kan-e, but could not come up with them, ao he returned.
prisoners captured were very many.
'rhe
In the army one could
exchange one living creattwe for a cap Ol' a pair of boots or n piece

THE EARLY SYtiM IN BURMA'S HISTORY
of felt. 'l'hn~:~o who escaped, moreover, were intercepted anu killed
hy A..ho an

86 G.H. Luce
In the 5th month ( J\Iay HOth-Juno 28th, 1280 ), he ordeJ·ed
Yi.innan province to despn,tcll 10,000 Ssi:lCh'uan troops, and commanded
Yo-la-hni to lead them, together with the generals previously
sent, for the Mien expedition.
In tho 19th year, 2nd month (March 11th- April 9th,
1282 ), he sent ol'Clers to Ssu, Po, Hsi:i_501 and other commancleries,
and to I-hsi-pu-hsieh502 and other places of the various southern
barbarians, to despatch loc;tl troops for tho Jillion expedition.
In the 20th year, 11th month (Nov. 21st- Dec. 19th, 1283 ),
the government army attacked Mien and conquered it. Previously
the Emperor had sent orders to the Prince of the Blood. Hsiangwn-ta-erh,
to the y1.t-ch'lmg ( Senim· Assistant-Governor) T'ai-pu,
and to the ts'an-chih-cheno-shUt (State Counsellor) Yoh-han.tichin,
to lead the troops on the Mien expedition. In the 9th month
of this year (Sept, 22nd-Oct. 21st), the main army started from
Chnng-ch'ing ( Yiinnan ]'u ). In the lOth month (Oct. 22ncl-Nov.
20th) it reached Nan-tien. T'ai.pu tool{ forward his troops by
way of Lo-pi tien. In the 11th month (Nov. 21st-Dec. 19th)
Hsiang-wu-ttt-erh commanded Yeh-han-ti-chin to take the road
by the A-hsi river, to reach the A-ho river of Ohen-hsi, and to
build 200 boats and float downstream to Ohiang-t'ou ('Riverhead')
city, and so cut off the water-road of the people of Mien.
He himself )eel one army by P'iao-tien straight into their kingdom;
and having joinecl hands with 'l"ai-pn's army, he ordered the
various generals to attack from di·ffercnt directions; whereupon
they captured by storm their Ohiang-t'ou city, killing in the
battle over J 0,000 men. He detailed the General Commander
( tu-y1£an-shu,ai ), H:1iiun Shih-an, to employ his troops in guarding
the land and collecting stores of grain to supply his forces. And
he sent messengers with a map of the country :for sullmission to
the Emperor.
In the 22ncl year. 11th month (Nov. 28th -Dec. 26th, 12R5),
the king of Mien sent his superintendent of salt wells, A-pi-lihsiang,
to T'ai-kung city. He wished to come and make terms,
but he was stopped by the Pni-i ('White Clothes') chieftain of

THE EARLY SYAtl1 IN BURMA'S HISTORY 87
Meng Nai lien, Tai-sai. Not being able to proceed, he sent one
'r'ilng-ma-chai,503 with a one-sheet supplementary letter, to bring
information to the native official of P'iao-tien, Ni-su, and bPg
him. to convey a message to the authorities above him, that they
should spare the army from entering the frontier. Ni-sn gave a
passport, and sent 'l''eng-nu1-chai back to Chiang-t'on city, and
summoned A-pi-li-hsia11g to go to the province. He alHo reported
the matter to the Senior Comforter ( hsuan.wei-ssu) and Comforters
( hsiian-fu-ss·u) of Chen-hsi, P'ing.mien, Li-ch'uan504 and
other Roads. They sent tln·ee pe1·sons holding paSS})Orts (shan.
ch'ih-pang ?)505 to Chiang.t'on city, for de1i very to the two pe1·sons,
A-pi-li-hsiang and Mang.chih-rm-suan, and fixed a date two
months later when they would lead a :force to Chia11g-t'ou city.
'l'he Comforters (hsiian-ftt-sstt) led Mongol troops to P'iao-tien,
where the interview took place ancl matters were discussed,
A-pi-li-hsiang begged them to address the Court to send down an
imperial edict accepting theh- repentance :for their transgressions;
after which (Mien) would send lt great minister to the Gate of
the Court. Soon ttfter, (the Emperor) sent Ch'ieh-lieh, the
darugaci of the Comfortership ( hsiian-fu-ssu) of Chen-hsi and
P'ing-mien, combining the office of chao.t' rw-shih ('imperial
delegate to summon and pnnish' ), as envoy to the kingdom
(of Mien).
In the 23rd yom·, lOth month (Oct. 19th- Nov. 16th, 1286),
the Emperor appointed the chao-t'ao-shih Chang Wan 506 as Assistant·
General Commander of Chang-mien (lit., 'Expedition to
Mien'); Yeh-hsien-t'ieh-mu-erh507 as dat·ugaci of the chao-t'ao-ss·u
(office of the chao-t'ao-shih) of Cheng-mien; and the ch'ien-ku
Chang. Ch'eng508 as chao-t'ao-shih of Ch\mg-rnien;
given the Tiger Tally.
all were
The Emperor's ordet·s were to build
fighting boats and lead an army of 6,000 men to Cheng-mien. He
made T'u-man-tai509 the General Commander, to be in general
charge. The Prince of Yunnan, in view of the fact that Ai-lu,
yu.ch'/mg (Senior Assistant Governor) of the province, had re-

88 d.Fi:. iuce
cei vecl imperial orders to raise levies from the land of Gold 'l;eet h
and Oh'a-lutn-tieh.chi-lien,5l0 despatched a force of 1,000 men.
In this same month (the cxpe

'l'ITit EARLY SYA""M IN BURMA'S HISTORY
lu thn :lr1l year, 3rd month (Apr. 2nd- BOth, 1299 ), Mien
tl~aiu HC•Itt its hl'ir-apparent to submit a memorial of thanks. He
In tnse lf l'Ppo rte1l that his tribespeople were being killed and
plnntltn'LHl by thro Gold 'l'eeth, and that this has caused generai
1.1ovortr mHl waut, thns malribg it impossible for them to pa)· the
gold aucl silks niferecl as tribute at the appointed time 1
'l'he
li:tu IJC'I'Ol' t.ool.;: ])ity on him 1 and only ordered him every othe 1
•
year to ofl'er tribute of elephants. As before, he hestowecl clothillg
on him and SPnt him back .
In the -ith year, 4th month (Apr. 20th • May 18th, lBOO ) 1
( MiPH)

G.H. Luce
the Comforte1· (hsuan-fu-sltih), Oh 'a-han-pu.lma, 5 12 were lJeheade

NOTES
THE EARL.Y SYAM IN BURMA's HISTORY
il,~H. ~,m; .:!. Olnt-frm-chih, 2 chuan, by J1!5:ki! Chao Ju-lnw of
the Sung dynasty. Transl. by Hirth and Rockhill: Chao Ju-lcna­
Ms worlc on the Oldnesc and Arau kade 7:n the XIIth and XIIItl:
cent. (1912, St. Petcrsbmg).
34H. 8·unu--~hih, ch. 489, Secti.on on Ohen-la.
:\50. :f-ii?Um 'l'eng.Jin-mei. See Pelliot, BEFEO t. IV, p. 2aa.
H51. 4jj:ftH-\% ~·[n(J-Wa7:-tw:-ta, 10 ch., by %.J:!dp Chou Ch'ii-fei.
Cnntninucl in the *lZ~)t.~l:'t Ohih-1JU-ts-u-chai.ts'un(J-shu of
-~~;!!.i-ff Pan T'in g-po, 17 87 (Shanghai, Ku-shn-liu-t'ung-ch'u,
19n-~!40
work.
vnls. ). I regret that 1 have no access to this important
i\52. -)if ,Fm jtl 'rau-mei-liu ldngclom.. See section on it at the encl
of eh. ·1.KU of the~ 1C:,'un(J-8hih. The section begins as follows ( 1 add
Pnlliot'~
irlcutificntions given on pp. 233-4 of BEFJ!:"!O t. IV): "To
tho PttHt, tn roae h .J; Rl/t Chan-la ( Camboclia) is 50 stages. To the
snnth, to reaeh 1./ik! Lo.yi:ieh ( Johore) is 15 stages by wate1·. To
the wNlt, to reaeh \!\1 Ji:.. Hsi-t.'ien ( Inclia) is 35 stages. To the
nol'th, to roach ~.ill
Ch'eng-liang is 60 stages. To the northeast,
to roaeh 1./Ut Lo-hu ( Lavo) is 25 stages. To the southeast, to
rt;aeh f?ll~ Shfl-p'o (,Java) is 45 stages. To the southwest, to
roac~h ;fl.*' Ch't 1 ng-jo is 15 stages. To the northwest, to reach
il~ Lo-hun iH ;.!:') stages. To the northeast, to reach "-71•] Knang.
chou (Can ton) is 1:35 strLges."
place at Ligor, Nagara SrT Dhn.rmnraja.
135i3. 5JtJtll'ffi.J Po-ssu-lnn . .Ji.J?. ~ Chen-li-fn.
a54. Etats Mndouises, p. 304,,
355. .E..~ San-lo.
Tan-mei-liu itsc 1f Pelliot would
356 :w m II · 1 See .111ing· -shih ch. 324, and Pelliot, Blf}Ji'I;JO
•, ·). .l.J!;.:o!J' · ::nen- o.
t. IV, p. 2i35.

92 G.H. Luce
357. 1.fim1- Lo-hu.
358. illi'"lt P'n-lwn.
359. fi..1f_ Wa-1i.
3GO.
'l'he Pa1i stone inscription (Pl. V 548a) of fh·i Ba}r·abha?·ar;,a,
probably .Z~Ian
Lulan ( Sawlu ), Aniruddha's son and
successor, found at Manng Law Kwin, S.E. of Mergui, seems to
shew that Anirnddha's conquests extended far south of Thaton.
Kyanzittha's minister, "the samben Anantay'eyyabhikran who
guards Daway" ( Tavoy ), has left Old Mon plaques near Mokti
village, south of 'l'avoy (see Rep. Anh. Sw1·v. Btt?"ma, 1924, PP·
38-40 ). Kyanzittha's grandson, in 11G4 or earlier, was involved
in quarrels with Parakkama Bahn I of Ceylon, which appear,
from ch. 76 of the Ou~avarnsn, to have concerned rights of passage
over the Isthmus of Kra. His successor, Narapatisithu, in his
Dhammarajal{a inscription (Pl. I 197-8, 1198 A.D.), gives as the
southern limits of his kingdom a whole series of places c1ifficult
to read, but probably exte11ding well below the Isthmus:- Tau·av
( Tavoy ), Oanha.t (?) Santhut (? ), Tanansare (Tenasserim),
'l'aJcwa ( Ta.kna-pa ), Snlank?YJ ( Jnnk Ceylon?), and two other
places httrdly legible, ending with a city .... nalcuiw' ( nagara ).
3Gl. ;W!:f.~Ill~.~ Chia-1n-na.ta-ssu ( Y.S., ch. 134 ).
3G2. £.'~'~fl]flb~ Hsing-ha-la-ti-wei. For early Chinese referencetl
to Ceylon, see REFEO, t. IV, p. 356 follg.
3G3. .~.;'\,$0 Ma-pa-ch·h (see Y.8., ch. 210 ).
3G4. K.A. Nilalmnt~1 Sastri, A Histm·y of South India, p. 212.
iHi5. 1Jl.~ Ch'ti-lan.
BGG. ntr,1J~ Hsii-men-na.
367. 1t ,t£ Seng.chi-li.
368. ~-1.\.;b Nan-wn-li. == the tffl&£ Nan-wn-H of the Y.S.
( ch. 18, Nov. 17th, 1294 ), the i[-1.\.Jl Lan-wn-li of Chao Jn-kua,
etc. (see BEFEO, t. IV, pp. 327, 344 ).

THE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY 93
369. .~iff- Ma-lan-tan. See Pelliot, BEPEO, t. IV, pp. 344-5
and n. 1.
370. 11~ 1l! Na-wang.
371. Tl'iiJ 9u Ting-ko-6rh. See Pelliot, BEFJ!J'O, t. IV, p. 344 and
n. 6.
372. *-*- Lai-lai.
373. .~ilJJ- M Ohi-lan-i-tai.
374. ~'*-~*Tl Sn-mn-tu-la, ~,;f..~tft Su-mu-tn-la, ~'*-$-fl}
Su-mn-ta-la, ~?f\..it Su-mu.ta, etc.
375. BEFEO, t. IV, p. 327, n. 4.
376. For the Uigurs and tl1eil· very mixed culture, seeR. Grousset,
H£stoire de l'Extreme-Ot'ient ( 1929 ), pp. 356-9, 406-7; L'Empire
des Steppes ( 1948 ), pp. 161-2.
377. ft.it El Hsin-chi:i Jih.
:~78. ~ P'o.
379. J.lt 'L'uan. The 'l'uan were kings of Ta-li at least h·om 1117
A.D., when $Jt~;f Tnan Ho.yi:i sent an embassy to the Sung
Court (Sung-shih ch. 488, Section on Ta-li).
380. ~ Kao.
381. :i* Hsien Tsung, Chinese title of the Mongol Emperor,
Mongka (fl. 1251-59). His younger brotheJ•, Khuhilai, was ordered
to "invade the south" in 1252, not 1253. (see Y.S., ch. 3, 2nd year
of Hsien Tsung, 7th month (Aug. 7th- Sept, 5th 1252): "The
Emperor ordered .ts&,'.!! Hn-pi-lieh to attack *-tJ!.. Ta-li." On
Mongk~i's death, in 1.259, Khnbilai succeeded as the Empe1·or -tl!-iJt
Shih Tsu.
382. ~# Kao Hsiang. See Y.S., ch. 4, 12th month, rping.ch'en day
(Jan. 7th, 1253) : "The army reached rra-li city. Formerly, the
lord of Ta-li, of the Tuan family, had gradually become weak.
State affairs were all decided by the brothers Kao Hsiang and
iff;~ Kao Ho. 'rhat night ( Kno) Hsiang took his followers ancl
escaped. The great general 41!. i; ,&.fii~ ~ Yeh-lm-chi-pa-t'n-erh

94 G.H. Luce
was ordered to pursue him. As soon as the Emperor entered
'fa-1i, he saicl: 'The city has been captured, but my ambassadors
have not been proclncecl. I think they must be dea(l.' ( 3 days
later they discover the corpses of the three ambassadors) lcuei-hai
day (Jan. 14th, 1253 ). Kao Hsiang was captured and beheaded
at fjUtl Yao-chou."
383. iJtA"'\r 'fuan Hsing-chih.
384. f~Jt>f& Hsin-chii Fu (I follow the reading in the Pai-na
text).
385. }ft-J"~~ Mo.ho-lo-ts'o (maha1·aj'a).
386. For Uriyangqatai, see n. 17 anll text.
387. Xlh.!: Ohiao-chih.
388. *f.J!. Ta-li: %M Shan-shan ( Yi1nnan Fu ); ~~ Wei-ch'u
( Oh'u-hsiung ); #c9t T'ung-shih ( Yao-chou ); -t" Jll I-Iui-ch'uan
(see Man-shu, ch. l; it was then at the south end of tho Ohiench'ang
valley, north of the Yangtr,tl., on the Nan-chao side of the
frontier); Jt~ Ohien.ch'ang; Jifu~ 'r'eng-yueh.
B89. 4;--ij}J ~ 4iJ N an.tien of Gold 'l'eeth. See n. 59.
390. .~~ I-Iu-tu. See n. 57 and text.
391. 't1-e. Meng Hua, S. of Ta-li Lake.
392. M/l A-ch'ing. The Eastern Palaeo was the residence of
the Heir·Apparent.
393. 1-t~JG Pai-ta-erh ( Baiclar ).
-394. According to the ;wan-shu ch. 8, the Western rrs'u::m word
for Salt was .!t pin ( pien ), the Eastern Ts'uan word was ~ chu,
hsou or jou (according to the K'ang-hsi dictionary). '.I.' he latter,
going back to a T'ang pronunciation like kon or kin (see B. Karl.
gren, Analytic Dictiona,J'Y of OMnese, No. 484 ), bears some resemblance
to Shan kttiw, Siamese tfl~'Cl.
395. {} JL#~ Hsi.li-ch'ien.pu. :!ft.·~ Ai-ln ( Airnq? ).
396. m Jt T'ang-wn ( Tangnt ):

;fHE EARLy SYAtl1 IN BURMNS HISTORY 95
397. 07!1:-wm: year ( 1259 A.D.).- This cannot be the campaign
against Ta-li ( 1252-3 ). It must refer to Khubilai's Cl'OSt:~ing of
the Yang-tz{l in 1259 to meet Uriyangqatai coming up from the
south.
398. *...t~Efr 'l'a-ming Road in Ohihli.
399. ~'V P'iao-tien. 'l'he same as -~JiJ P'iao-tien. See n. 29,
and Huber p. 666.
400. X..~J.i. I-Iuo-pu-ma. A misprint for JZ~Ii~ 'l''ien.pn-xna,
the Nam Kham route into Burma. See n. 52, and Huber p. G65.
401. lf /!'Sf>- Ohung-ch'ing Road (Yunnan Fn and neighbourhood).
402. 1~~ Yung-ch'ang (modern Pao-shan ).
403. :tm-?t ~ Hsiang-wn-erh. For Hsiang-wu-ta-erh ( Si.i.ngqudfir).
See n. 77 and text.
404. For the 'l'angut and Hsi-hsia (capital Ning-hsia ), see
R. Grousset, Hist. de l'E-0., p. i)70, n. 3; 371, n. 1; 424, etc.;
B. Laufer, "'l'he Si-Hia Language," 'l"oung-pao, mars 19lfi.
405. ~.fo...W Sai-tien-oh'ih, Sayyid Ajall. Seen. 62, and Grousset,
op. cit., p. 459 and n. 7; p. 460, n. 1.
406. #.JI:J.i!tlJT Fa-sn-la-ting, Nasir ec1-D1n. See n. 62 and text.
407. ;~ :¥:' Hu-hsin, Husain.
408. i{t~~ Lo-p'an tien. See snpm, p.
409. :fk.it ch'iu-hao, 'autumn hair.' Fol' this curious expression,
see I-LA. Giles, Chinese English Dictionary (2nd. Ed.), No. 3873.
410. $ !W /Eft Yi.in-nan Road. 1 do not know a Road of this name
under the Yi.[an. I think the meaning is '.t 1~lf~ " all the
various Roads of Yi.:innan."
411. iill.ll'dbit.tii!OO P'u and P'iao, Oh'u-la, and Mien ldngkom~
See notes 29, 31, 56.
412. ~~~ T Shan"ssu"ting, Shams ud"Din, "Sun of the :B'aith,"
the Muslim title of Sai"tien-ch'ih.
413. -lt~fi9JT Yeh-han-ti-chin, Yagan-tegin ( n. 76 ).
414. lit *IJ ·i 1-Isia-la-ln, Qarluq.

96 G.H. Lui!e
415. :k r T'ai"pn ( n. 75 ).
416. f111 ~~ §(., I-Isiang-wu-ta-erh, Siingqi:idar ( n. 77 ).
417. M * M -f. rn ~ "the two rivers, A-hsi ancl A-ho." 'l'he A·hsi
is the Nam Ti, and the A-ho the 'l'a-p'ing. Sec Huber, p. 6G9 and n. 1.
418. ~ jJi J~ Ohiang-t'ou ('Riverhead') city, i.e., Kmmgzin
(Old Burm. Koncan ). See n. 64.
'419, *-it 4(- Lai Shih-nn.
420. See n. 81.
421. See n. 82.
422. See n. 82.
423. For the Qarluq, see Grousset, H·ist. de l'E.-0., p. 407 and
n. 3. For tegin, ib,id., p. 416, n. 3.
424. ~'if 4(- Hsi:i.an Shih-an ( Y.S., ch. 210, Section on Mien).
$:ilt*- Yi:i.nn Shih-an (Huber's text, p. ()69 ).
4,25. 5kj; ~XX. Ohnng-wan-chia-nn. 1;%i: Pao-t'ung.
426. ::t._ '1~ Ji}(. 'r' ai-kung city, i.e. '1\Lgn.ung (Old Bnrm. 'l'ctlcon)
See n. 82.
427. -!ttl·j 1-4:/t Shan-tan of Knn-chou (in Kunsu ). Lat. 38" 50',
Long. 101" 29' ( Playfair, No. 5462 ).
428. 11'~-f-' fc,,ft Yeh-li.i. T'u-hua. •fc"t *it Mang-Jm.tai ( Miitlgiitai).
429. #:It Oh'i-tan ( Khitai, Cathay).
430. .$..-if Ohu .. Jw.
431. ~:i Pao-t'ung.
432. lit~~ Lo-pi tien.
433. ~* Ta-pen. Possibly the ~T * 'l'a-pen, chieftain of Gold
Teeth, mentioned in a report elated Aug. 31st, 1287 ( Y.S., ch. 14,
24th year, 7th month, lcen{!-hsu day): '' ~ ·'i· Ai-lu of Yiinnan
province said:' 'l'he Golcl Teeth chieftain, 'ra-pen and othovs, elder
and younge1' brothers, ask leave to submit to China. Mo.reover
they request permissio11 to enter the Presence.'"
434. M ~ A.t'ai.

97
.j.;l;:;, l

9s
G.H. Luce
the 7th-8th cent., and probably Halin (Old Burm. Hanlah) neai·
Shwebo in the Bth-9th. I hardly think Oh'ieh-lieh would have
been posted to either of these in the 13th. I prefer, therefore,
to regard "P'in.o ldngclorn" as an archaistic term here applied to
the Burmese capital, Pagan. And it recalls to my mind the fact
that Stone 5 nt Pagan .Museum (found near the main gate of the
city) has a Pyii inscription on the east face, and a Chinese one
on tb e west. Neither has been read, though expert rubbing of
the hLtter might well yield some meaning to the expert. Did
Oh'ieh-lieh "encourage the nationalists" by seeking to revive the
Pyu language?
456. iE..~.::k*. ch'imu-1:-ta-ju. *~>fft>f""i"~f ch'ien-m£en.
chung -hsing -chung -shu- sh~ng -shih.
457. i! 1f. .::k *. t'u,ng-feng.ta-fu. See Giles' Dictionary ( 2ncl Eel.),
No. 12, 294.
458. j!f -%.::k*. t.z-u-shan-tct-fu.
459. See n. 3Gl.
4GO. ~% §(., Wei-wn-erh ( Uigur ). l!'or the Digl1l' Tnrl,s, see
n. 37 G and text.
4Gl. Sec n. 362.
4G2. .ill. Hsien (n. 111 ). !.Ut Lo-hu ( n.ll2 ). ·~-"'- §(. Ma.pa.erh
( n. 363 ). 1Jl-]i Oh'ii..lan ( n. 365, Quilon ). ~ ;f.Ai~ t1J Sn-mn.tn-la
( n. 37 4, Samndra ).
4-G3. .#; tlJ~:::tx.'i'-J;i.ll\ Y o-la-yeh-nn-t'ieh-mieh.
464. fisi:. * Oh'cng Tsung ( Tami.ir Oljaiti.i, fl. 1295-1307 ).
465. '(;:.* Jen Tsung (fl. 1:311.1320 ).
466. ~ 1k ssu-t'u.
467. f1ji£. Liu Cheng.
468. ~ jt;fj& * I'Jt "f t',ung.ch'ien-slm-mi-yiian-shih.
4ti9. fC: 7t. ~ •lf·i!.~ Mang-wn-t'u-ln-mi-shih ( 1\Gngi.i Tiirumish).
See also n. 194.
470. "~ fl] (@3. Ha-la-tai ( Qamtai ). See also n. 299, 307.

THE EARLy SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY
4,71. "~ ·W· Ha-1n ( Qarlnq ). 0£. n. 4l4, 423.
4 7:2. ~ f.i *-* tz·tt-(e.tl/.ju.
470. J!]~ Lin Shen, Of. n. 299, 307.
4 74. Ser• n. llil,
47f1. *~~ Snng Lung-chi.
47ti, ):k •JH Ju-ehon (in Honan).
•177. Y.8., ell. 20, 5th year of ta-te, 5th month, Jen-hsu day.
478. Rln l7C. - Shun-ynan. .. 'l'his "\VI1S a Road on the Yi:innan-Kueiehon
border, nnw nnclcr Kuei-yang district of Kueichou (see Tsang
Li.hnn's Oompr·elwnwive Chinese Gazettee?' ( 1930, Shanghai Cornmorcial
Pres~:~), p, 972.
479. Jl,fl:Jfl Yiieh Hu-nan.
4RO.
481.
482.
4Hi\.
4H4.
4Hr,.
ch'en[l
Y.S., eh. 21, 8th year of ta-te, 1st month, keng.shen day.
SRM 1f[ Sung A-chung.
Y . .':i., eh. 21, 8th yen.r, 5th month, chi-ssu day.
mtmt ifF w Jf?. 'l"o-t'o.i-chi-li.
~>!l.-Jt # Oh'Cm 'l"ien-hsi an g. ~tii!>
Oh'en Bu.
~ t'tl ft..! hsinu-t'a·i of Honan. ~r .t,tj:> ~ yi~-shih-chwzg.
Mlli. A :ti1 P a-fau. Onllerl .->"-{!}'Kit Pa-fan-lo below in this same
extract. "'l'hc chief of the Pa-fan Cave barbarians" sent an
embassy to China, with Hsien, on Feb. Gth, 1323 ( n. lil3 ). See
Polliot's notn, J3JCFJiJO t. IV, p. 244-, n. 1. On Nov. 2Gth of the
samo yc:Lr ( YB., ch. :29, Brcl year of chih-chih, lOth month, 'P1:ngh81~

100 G.H. Luce
492. jt;!Jp~3- Naug-chia.tai ( Nangkiyatai ).
493. ~i!ii Mien. To those translations of the Sections on Mien and
Hsien, I add in the notes only the Chinese of names, etc., not
given in the body of the article.
4.94. I doubt if the 1ea.f of the areca-nnt ( r.Ji~ pin-lang, Malay
pinang, Areca catecln~) was usecl in Old Burma for stationery,
though I. H. Burkill (A DicUonary of the JiJconomic Products of the
Malay Penins'ula, Vol. I, p. 228) mentions modern experiments,
which were "disappointing,'' in tu1·ning the husk of the arecanut
into paper. I suspect that" arC'ca" in the text is a mistake
for another palm, whether palmyra ( Borasstts jlal!elUfer) or
talipot ( Oorypha umbram.tlifera ), which were certainly used for
writing materials at Pagan.
495. 1fl-i:i!f Chieh-po.
496. r $ *. Pn-yiin.shih ( Bi.iyiinch? ).
497. j[ Jl Ch'ung'ch'ing, in S.E. Ssttch'nan ( E Pa ). Lat. 29o i\4',
Long. lOtio 50' ( Playf:tir, No .. 158:1 ).
498. #.HEl nt ][ :?{f:~ the ch'eno-h.~1:ano 'l''o-Ii-to-hai.
499. 4'--ftJ:t Hu-la-chang. 'l'he Knrajang or "Black .Jallg" of
Hashicled-clin. See Pelliot, BEFEO t. IV, pp. 158-9.
500. FJ ][ ~ 1 A-li-ha.i-ya ( Ariq.qaya ).
501. .~H~ ~l Mt .fl~ Sf:lu, Po, Hsi.i. and other commancleries. Ss1l.-chou
is in Kueichon (Lat. 27° 11', Long. 108° B5' -- Playfail' 585H).
Po-chou is in Kueichon (see n. 488 ). Hsi.i-chon is in Ss1~ch'uan
(Lat. 28o 47', Long.l04• 51'-Playfair 2895).
502. 1Jf ~~ ~ 1-hsi-pu.hsieh. Also written ;jf- 't 1-ch'i-pn.
hsieh. "A special tribe of ¥.lU~ ~ Lo-shih-lmei kingdom," adds
the commentator a.t the end of Y.S., ch. 10. Here, under date lGth
year of chih-yuan, 6th month, kuei-ssu clay (July 27th, 1279 ),
we read that "f.: :f Ai-lu, clirecting his troops from cli.fferent
. qua.rters, pa.cifiecl 1-ch'i-pu-hsieh." Further expeditions- took
place in 1280, when the tribes Sl:tbmittecl ( ch, 11 ). The Emperol·'s

THE EARLY SYAM IN BURMA'S HISTORY 101
order, shown in the text, is dated April 1st, 1282 in the :f/en.chi
( ch. 12- 19th year, 2nd month, j(m.tz'u day).
503. Jfl.~ !{: T'eng-ma-chai.
504. £ Jll Li-ch'nan. A mistake for Jl Jll Ln-ch'nan.
505. ;ft:tft~ shan.ch'ih.pang.
506. 51:.~ Chang Wan.
507. -l:t7(.~;:;f... '§0 Yeh··hsien-t'ieh-mn-erh, Asiin Ti:imi:ir.
508. 51:.i\ Chang Ch'eng.
509. 'it 5itJ. T'u-man-tai ( Ti:im'ti.ndar ).
510. ~JF:i!~it Ch'a-han-tieh-chi-lien. (Chi1gan=White).
511. f.6 It Kao Ch'ing. 'l'he same person as the Kao A-k'ang,
"native chief of Y~~nnan," of Huber's text ( pp. 67 G-9 ).
512. ~:f~.?t Ch'a.han-pn-hna (Ohagan-bnqa). He had been
go-vernor of £~ Li-chiang distric:t, says Huber's text ( p. G79 ),
in the north west of Yi.i.nnan.
513. .il! Hsien. Pelliot has translated this Section at BEFEO,
t. IV, pp. 242, ;!43.
514. j£~~*11 Jf Wan-tse-ta-la-lum ( Oljai-darqrm ). Trt-la-han,
says Pelliot, was an old 'l'nrldsh title (BEFliJO, t. IV, p. 24,3, n. 7).
515. ·111'~ Hsin-t11, Sindlm, Hindu, India.

LITERATURE
A POETIC TRANSLATION FROM THE SIAMESE
PRINCE DAMRONG'S REPLY IN VERSE TO RAMA V
by
(James 91/ . .3r{osel

A POETIC TRANSLATION FROM THE SIAMESE
Prinee Damrong's Reply in Verse to Rama V
by
cfjames 51\f. :ff{osel
In 1893, King Ohulalongkorn was face1l with a nationtt1
cns1s. The French, with gunboat diplomacy 1 were pressing for
the concession of large portions of Lao territory ·which at the
time were tributary to Siam. 'l'he King fell seriously ill, both
in body and spirit, and ceased taking his medical treatment.
. ~ d
In deep anguish he composed a poem in chancl ( 'iUI'Vl) verse
bidding farewell to the royal family. H.R.H. Prince Damrong
Rajnnubhab relates that upon receiving his copy, he immediately
composed a poem in reply. It is said that as soon as the King
had finished rending the reply his spirits were renewed; he
resumed his medicine and soon wns able to get about once more. 1
Prince Damrong is remembered as nn outstanding
scholal' and a brilliant administrator rather than as a poet.
However, like mauy of his royal compatriots he instinctively
(and quite competently) turned to verse to express his most
delicate and deeply felt thoughts. His poetic reply to King
Ohnlalongkorn is of interest not only for its touching eloquence,
but also for its unusual (but little recognized) histDl'ical signifi.
cancc, and for the insight it. affords into the character of a g1•eat
man.
The poem is written in classicial chand ( 'il."u~) verse, the
most difficult an

A POETIC TRANSLATION FROM THE SIAMESE 105
because of its rigorous rules regulating the sequences of "heavy"
( fl'i) and "light" ( C\'tl) syllables. These requirements oblige
'
'
the poet to employ a large number of Indic loan words, with
the result that the composition appenrs learned and formidable;
and also dignified and stately. Chand is rarely written
nowadays. In the clays of the absolute monarchy when court
activities were more prominent, it was the favored medium for
royal eulogies and ceremonial occasions. 'rllUS it was the
natural metre for the events of 1893.
English translation crmnot, of conrse, reproduce the
acoustic effect of the chand metre. To compensate for this loss,
the translator has attempted to recreate the mood of the poem
by choosing English words which at times extend the imagery
of the original wording.
The translator wishes to express his great gratitude to
H.S.H. Princess Poon Pismai DisJml who aroused his interest in
the poetic worl\S of Prince . Damrong, and to Mr. Davi Dvi­
Vardhana who gave indispensable assistance in forcing certain
cranky Inclic loan words to yield up theil· poetic meaning.

ios
. i
James N. Mosel
~
']fll~~ ~llJfl~:U'l'Vl
lj.;;~~~~
ll
l~r""':U'V'lj~J'l~Vl'l'U
~ '\: "-' ,(
'Vl~ U"l~~U'i:'l~ofi'U'VJ[fl
jJ
.... ~
fl i-!ill :r ~1.Jr ~'11 IJ r m -:J
t
1J
LVI ~'1'11 'l'V'l 'J ~:U'l'Vl f"liJ 'l ~
il;;; ....
~ ~'U~VJ-:~ nmyru
jJ
I
Aa_;~
fl'lij d''l~ '\.! 'W '\.l'li ~
2../Q ..::::.oA~~
"1111"l-1VJHl'ld''Vlml.J
~ ,..,il;;;
'\.! ll Vl'Vl-:1 lr.J'Vl f~iJ 'll.J
v
Vlfl'VlU'l'Vl'ilA1~
1 1 :IJ
.... ,f
iJ 'J 11 'Vl 'il "11 Vl J'I.!'Vl J'l iJ
1 1 1
t
~Jr'H Vl 'i:i'l'WICi~'U'l
1
v '-'
'\.!'liJVl'ltl 11~ '1-Wrl
0 .... ,f
'hl'liJ'il~iJj~f"!'ll"lflj
l"l~J'fl'il:f~LLIJ.:J "
A a_. !..J ,4
fl~flfl'Vlfl'Vl'\.!'l'Vl
t d. 1
l'V\[fl'V\'l,jlJVJ'iJ'l'\.1
,
v t ""
ml"l~IJ'llJnmn!"l
.& t
LrtJumnl::LICi'i:'ll.J
v ~
:U'WlJ CJ "'l ~'W.:] ©:u 'liJ
ll
I 2..-' t=J Q.,
!J ~l'VIIJ IJ 1m11 [11 '\.!
""' "
'W r"!Vl '1-:\'ilf"l 'bl'l~ llfl i(i,j
"'l~ 1~wun~~mL Vl'\.1-:J
"'1~'1JVlu'fir ~mr
1
,; d. '-'
Vl fl'] Vli'J'Vl fliJ'\.!IJ'l j
1 , '-'
fl~llf"ltll~~'ll"'l'11W
~1J~WJru~t~~
d. I " "-'
~"~ mJr v lJillflfl'W fl n u
"-'
1-J fl d'li'J'Vl tJ ~ V'l 'l iJ t-1 'U
, 1
t.IIJ::V'lflfl'l'bl-1 ld'tl
'Vl'l'ilfl r rl.J f"l:ur Hl 1~

A. POETIC TRA.NSLA TION FROM THE SIAMESE
107
En!!l·ish [l'·rt•o F (1'1'8e
May it tllcnse yon, 1:1ire; Inoat noble one above us:
1 stancl in confidence and gratitude, and yet in tears.
Your lines have come to hand and eye .
And my tlwnght to your illness turns,
Your illness shttretl in truth by all your nation.
Each one is frangh t so deep
It esc:tpes t1u~
poet's artful phrase,
Though I Htand nPar nnd know it be not mortal.
If blood and flesh could blend as balm or herb,
1 wonlrl in haste give mine to heal.
To seek contentment in another face or eye is vain,
For no day brealn\ lmt to recount complaint and anxious heart.
We arc itS mariners, all sorrowing for our captain;
Liken us to a helmsman who peers ahead uncertain of his course,
Or to the engineer by the ship's machines
Ready to throttle full ahead, yet staying his hand in doubt,
Waiting with vigi1anco for any sign,
In fear that; time will not last out the tide.
We are m1eal:ly in onr tasks;
Our plight redoubles with each day.
l!'ar we ttro from ynnr path, my lord, the path of the people's trust;
''l'ia not amiss to Ray thtLt in our rounds
We l'OWnnhlo a ship that flounders in the sea,
In lHttnre's way; hetimea the ocean's winds are stilled,
But betimes come hnl'l'icaues and waves to break and pour upon us.
If the vessel's might is equal to the sea
She makes her conrsn unscathed, without event,
But if doom so decrees, therJ every vessel shall be lost;
These things the hearts of mal'iners know well.
Bnt while their deelts rernain afloat
'rhey meet the sea wi t.h their united strength
Ancl bring their craft to shore, rejoicing to survive.
If their strivings fail, and they go tlown,

108
.& " ' '-"
jj'l!JL'Jflfl'tlfl'l-l'J
~
LL~~fl'tlfi~Vl:f11J 1~
A vo>
L'VIf[;'lfiLL 'il'f1i'l:I"Jj._j
t.JIJ:Vlfl~'li'J:'\.-l-:J
d. " 0 j
i'l~~fl~l1)©1
~ ]
A ~ r v _,..,
t.l ~~ mm PH11 LL fl
James N. Mosel
~ A
I"J:'Jfli91Vl-:] f"l:jf '(..!jfj._J
1 ~1111flUJ~1~-:]'jljj1_]
1Jr.J'U'\.-l-:]L'tJ'tlr.J't11Vl'l
~ d. v '
L'VIi-lfl'\.-!Vlll'ill'l-JW:l'l~ l'VIr.J
1 VlL~j.,JLLU~-:] I"Jj._jll\
1fl:r~fl'\.-!1l'J :'l-!1Vl11"l
I
r~~ ~1 j fJ'l'il'J j 'l-l Lfl'\.-l
~ 2-·
'\.-!1'\.-!~111"l;1
.... ~
i'l flfJ'\.-l'\.-l fl'l~ j
, :!1
.& ~ A t v
Lll!'tJ lJPl'H 'V\j.,J flU flUJ-:]j.,J'l
A a...- ~
tJfl U"l:ffl-:]lJ-:] L 'VI'tl '\.-lfl'lU
:!1
A
.... .!
fl fltl 'W :r :11 :r: VllJ fl'l ~u
Vl1 j._j LL~'Jil 1 :Vl~~/l Vl
1m~ 1TI~u1~L~fl'il
' k
lfl!11JLV111"J:'bl.:!r.J'l
"]fllfl'l'ti1~Vl'l'VI©"-'1J
.
0 .... =
fl'l©.:J 191 fl'ill"l-:] I"J'l-l©'bl)
]
f1J.lj.,J'l1J~ f'lj._IVJ ~
1 ,J ll
LLfJl'Vl11T:jffJjU1'\.-l
d. '"I
VJ LlJ '\.-! 'W 1'VI u :m u
0 2.,1 a,_, OJ'
llr :l"l 'l'VIU 'l'Jil 'i.11J'Jil ©'ljf 'tJ
'il'd: WiJUlJ'lVli'l :'Jil 'llfl 1(,1
M:jj""n1 tl"3h'ti']IJ'l
.& "
l'l:'il J' :LWJ fl'il Llfl J.J1l:r :P~'l
.& ....
r:jf r.Jifli-l'i.11'tl1lntu
v
Mm~~:lJ'QJl:~'l
j
©---lfl~.;;l'j,:j 1~~~
di'U V\ 'l j: LL 'VI-:] fl'l
~Vl;Wl~~ 1uVIJ.J1'iJ

A POETIC TRANSLATION FROM THE SIAMESE 109
The world will call it fate, and know their death was not in vain.
But were neglect to still their toil
And make them vacillate, confused,
And cease to mend their ship,
The ship is lost, as were their strength exceeded,
How differe11t if the answer lay beyond our power
And we were drowned;
For then no man can dare malign
Nor call us heedless, craven.
Through this defeat comes name and praise,
Since compassion knows fate conquered strength, if thus we drowned.
Each day I grieve that you are ill,
There comes to mind a simile;
I am like your steed, your charge,
Harnessed and saddled, waiting for you to mount
Before the Royal Pavilion,
Feet chafing the earth to carry you forward
To your destination,
Left or right, far or near,
With all my might and no debate
To life's last breath.
My Liege, I beg to die with eyes closed in contentment
In a name recalled for courage.
I was born to bear this burden
And fulfill the task assigned.
May the power, the devout desire of these, my words
Qop.snmmate what lies within my heart;

110
""' ,(
'W:i' :f'i!VJVJ'\1~ j ~ f1 :i'fl'l'i.J
James N. Mos~l
,A
1J j'J.,I'U 1fiL j .:J lflrc1'El'U f"' 'b'l1'i.J
I 2..J ~ I
f'il \l &Jfi.:J 'W U'VlVIl-1 UVI1-J 1.:1
A 1
,_,.
'] flL VWI V1 ':tl U '] Wl
.&9 9 ""
f'il.:J flrc11'i.JL 'V!l-1 'El'UV!rc'n'tllJ
~ "" ""
l'Wl-lLm.J:rflltJunrc~
9 :u
"' n-t> ..... ""
f'il:I"J:UVJ'Wj~']f!fll
,!!, ""
rc1~1(.'ll-JLIC1'illi:l~'b'l1'i.J~t~
:u
'i.J~f11fJj'W'U
9 :u
Q.,..o ~ Q...# tf
~ U1l-l j j 'W'W !IJJ 'U tJ rc1

A POETIC TRANSLATION FROM THE SIAMESE
iii
And may ymtr tl'ihnlations all be banished ,
Yonr botly and spirit cleansed
Beyond tlte touch of infelicity;
May yon fnlfi1l yonr every design and wish.
In ynur shelter, my lorcl, lios om• oneness;
May this a.d versity that smites forbearance
Be severed as iu hmg years past,
And lie forgott.en, vanquished and dissolved;
May these your times endure, 1~eplenish
With r(mewetl honor and service
To glorify, exalt the state of Siam.

soaK·; REVIEWs
Charles lhwid Shnl1lon, 1'he Bise of the il1erchant Class ,·n m 1
• • .L o,cuyawrt'
1 npttn, 1 r,u0-18fi8. J.,J. Augustin Locust V·ll N
or.s • ·' ey, ew York
lv.J • ~011 pages, including index. '
'I' he betrothal of a commoner ' to Crown p "'1nce .. · Al n ·1 nto ·
whose . father . bcga11 . his . rule as an absolute mon' arc h , provo 1 •eel'
far less suq>rlso to students of Ja.panese history than to those
more familiar_ with European monarchical behavior. The merger
of the Imperwl ilynnsty with the great commercial house of
Shoda ii'l uo more mwxpected to the scholar than is the economic
resnt•grmce t-war Japan. Such events are quite compatible
with the trend of developments in Nippon over the last fom
htnulretl years. Iu thil:l bool\:, which he modestly terms an "introductory
survPy," Dr. Sheldon describes and analyzes a substantial
soguwnt of this trend and opens the cloor to one of the
moro nwanill gfnl a ud fascinating chapters of pre-Meiji Japan.
'l'hir.l bonk is long overdue. For while its subject is one
of major t~ignificallco it Ju:ts been considered ·by only some two
dnzou Wm;teru seltolars and by none of them in any complete
sense. On thEJ ,Tarmneso side the growth of the merchant class
has provider1 a tlwnw for scholarly research ancl writing almost
from tho iuePption of the ~.rokugawa Shogunate, but too little of
thif.! has been :wai1alllo to Western scholarship.
Ono eou 1 d Hay unqunlifiedly that the rise of the commercia1
gl'rmpf:l (luriug tho Tonka 7. 1 aihei period was the most distinguishing
foatlu·o of tho more than two and one half centuries
of 'l'olmgawa hormit:Lgo. In the writer's hands this phenomenon
remains iu context wi thon t losing either perspective or emphasis.
~L'his is by no rneans an easy task. J'apanese economic historians
are sharply diviclcHl in their opinions on this subject. Although the
apocryphal must he boiled off with care, there is no lack of facts.
'rhe real rliff:erences Jie in interpretation, and Dr. Sheldon handles
very neatly such contentious questions as whether or not Japanese
indnstria.l capital was a conversion of earlier commercial capital,
or whether the economic foundations of the Meiji period rested
principally upon the chon-in of Osaka and Edo (Tokyo) or upon

114 BOOK REVIEWS
their upstart provincial competitors of the Nineteenth Oentm;y,
He does not allow speculation to side-track him from his basic
purpose of examining the historical growth of Japanese commercial
interests during this period as against nine critel'ia. The
result is a tight, coherent narrative which does not neglect any
of the major implications.
It is hardly strange that the merchant, occupying by
Sixteenth Century law the bottom of the Confucian hierarchy,
should become so dominant a force during the Tokngawa era. It
would have been inconceivable had this not taken place. The
civil wars of the Yoshino period, following the brief imperial
restoration of Daigo II, the grallual collapse of Ashikaga authority,
and the century of almost uninterrupted internecine strife
after the Onin War resulted in comple.te political disintegration.
The national unification that followed, begun by Nobnnaga ancl
completell by Tokngawa Ieyasu, left the latter as virtual ruler
of the entire land. It also left him with a. number of powerful
daimyo, who in feudal tradition were great landholders and gen.
tlemen-warriors. These chief samurai ancl their lef:lser noble
vassals had dominated Japan since the Kamakura period. Hicleyoshi,
Ieyasu's liege lorcl, had tried to curb sammai power
through the attrition of a foreign war. The founder of the Tokugawa
line, however, helcl his daimyo nncler control through
hostages, and through required travel ancl construction which
kept them insolvent. The "Great Peace" he initiated ttunecl
warriors into rice fa nnel'S who wet·e burdened with feuclal obliga.
tions and restrictions and contimmlly short of cash.
Samurai could not engage in trade and retain the privileges
of nobility. Yet as the transition from a rice economy
to a money economy began, commerce loomed as essential to the
Japanese economy, pa,rticularly after foreign tracle was forbiclclen
in 1624. Merchants were taken under samurai protection, ancl
in some cases, such as those which involved the founders of the
Mitsui and Sumitomo fortunes, samurai cheerfully gave up their
positions at the top of the social laclcler to become brewers, pawnbrokers
ancl ir.onmongers.

BOOK REVIEWS
llfi
It is not surprising that in samurai fashion the commercial
class developed a merchant's code based upon those principles of
loyalty and apprenticeship dear to Japanese feudal concepts.
Appropriately, the code was rooted in commerce rather than in
war, and while waniors languished for lack of an opportunity to
apply their trade, businessmen were tested regularly through
absence of adequate legal status, jealousy of the nobility, unusual
hazards of commerce, and a rapacious governmental bureaucracy.
Rising to the double challenge of a need for their services ancl a fat
profit, hedged with considerable risk, the merchants ended the
first century of the Edo era as the most powerful economic force
in the conn try.
Dr. Sheldon handles this first century and its finale in the
Genrolm period with competence and perception. He sldllfully
unravels the skein of commercial practice and clearly traces
primary and secondary developments in growing mer can tile might.
rrhe impact of this new, if classless, class upon samurai culture
is not neglected. In fact, he devotes an entire chapter to the
conflicting ideas of scholars retained by samur£1i lords and merchant
princes. While there is no mention of Sakuma Shozan or
Yoshida Shoin in these accounts, this cannot be considered an
omission with respect to the author's basic critet·ia. Dr. Sheldon
indicates that the merchant class wns provided with a small
window on the world through the limited Dutch and Chinese trade
at Nagasaki and through a few travelers abroad who returned to
Nippon prior to the edict of 16!36 which forbade Japanese to leave
their homeland. However, the limited foreign tracle of the pre­
Tokugawa era had no real significnnce in the subsequent rise of
the merchant class, and those later Nineteenth Century scholars
favoring foreign trttde for Japan belong in another context.
Yamaganta Banto, Honda Toshiald and Sato Shin'en are duly
mentioned with respect to foreign trade, but, as the author points
out, their views on this subject were carefully kept from the
governing Balcufu.
In the post-Genroku period the writer favors the historical
thesis of city (merchant) versus countl'Y (feudal) in a shifting
struggle that ended in the faHnre of the Tempo reforms in 1843,
and began the history of the Meiji Restoration. In this analysis

116 BOOK REVIEWS
Dr. Shelrlon clearly shows that national economic forces we1•e on
the side of the chom:n so long ns mercantile groups retained tl1eil·
vigor. In a number of cases the feudal reforms actually \Vorked
to the advantage of commercial circles. Of great importance
was the legal chartering by Shogun Yoshimune of the naleama.
Thus, by having lawful status given to their guilds ancl trade
asF:Jociations, the merchants received what they had desired for
over a century-official recognition.
The feudal reforms were doomed to faihue at the start.
Even in so static a society as the Eclo era, regression can have no
more than a limited life. Besides, the reform movements were
a living p1•oof of the ineffectiveness of the Balcufn bureau01:acy.
Their main purpose was to relieve banluupt national treasuries
caused by overspending and inefficient management. As long as
the reforms succeeded ancl the merchants bowed to enforced
loans and to cancellation of existing debts the deaclloclr remainerl.
It was l1l'01{en, as was the authority of the Bakufu, when the
refot•m decrees could not be enforced.
The writer shows that the merchant class b1·ol;:e the
Shogunate, but he does not credit the clw11.1:n with the restoration
of the Emperor. The merchant class in Tolmgawa Japan was
as much a part of Shogunate society as the Balcttfu itself. After
the failure of the Tempo reforms most of the merchant princes
of Edo and Osaka found they lacked the ability and the foresight
to handle competently growing national economic pl'ohlems and
the increasing agitation for fo1•eign trade. In 1Joth of these aspects
their provincial rivals showed g1·eate1· skill and acumen. In many
cases provincial merchants had become allied with samurai who
had finally reached the conclusion that trade was p1•efernhle to
slow economic st1•angulation.
Dr. Sheldon's work is a fil'st-class scholarly contribution
and is unqualifiedly recommended. The reader is left with a
number of queries but these are primarily speculative and never
clue to oversight. In this sense the book is a highly satisfactory
intellectual smorgasbord; while the appetite is momentarily
satisfied, it is whetted toward flll·ther exploration of some of the
intriguing dishes off:erecl.
G· [}rant 3r{eade

BOOK REVIEWS
Brooks Wright, Inlt;I'JJJ'cle7' oj B·uddh·ism to tl'e uresl· c"' l'.l ·
' vr, , • o~r .~r unn
ltrnoltl. ~~~H•]onan AHsociates, Inc., New York, 1957. 187 pages.
Mally copies of Sir Edwin Arnold's poem on the life of
Buddha! 'l'lte. IAuht of Asia, are still extant in Thailand. It was
pnblishecl in 1R7H, ancl the author sent a copy to the King of
Siam through the Siamese Minister in London; in December of
that year Sir Edwin received from His Majesty the Order of
the White Elephant.
117
"The royal letter which accompar1ied the
award imtJlied that Arnold's interpretation of Buddhism was
not strictly orthrHlox, bnt expressed gratitude for 'having made
a European Bn

118 BOOK REVIEWS
science, art, and politics.
languages and to travel widely.
He found time to acquire twelve
In 1877 he received the order
of Companion of the Star of India, and in 1888 he was knighted.
The poet laureateship might have been granted him upon the
death of Tennyson in 1892 had it not been for Gladstone's
opposition.
In the 1870's, men of liberal views in Englnnd responded
to the broad outlook of Hegelian philosophy, the rationalizing
spirit and scientific viewpoint of the Ago of Enlightenment, and
to the art and philosophy of Asia. The English public welcomed
books on the East following the proclamation of Queen Victoria
as Empress of India in 1877.
In 1879 Arnold published The Light of Asia, a long
narrative poem with an Indian background setting forth the
life and teachings of Gautama the Buddha.
Fo1• source material
he was chiefly dependent upon Samuel Beal's English translation
of a Chinese text of the Abh,in1:shlcramana Sntra, the Rev. 'l'.S.
Hardy's A JJ!Ianual of Buddhism, and Max Muller's translation
of the Dhammapada, together with some parables of Buddhagosha.
The novelty and timeliness of this sul)jcct quickly
gained world-wide recognition for the author.
Invitations to
visit the East poured in upon him, and in 1885 he set out on a
tour of India,
The Buddh Gaya episorle can best be apprecintC'd by
those Thai officials recently commissioned to erect a temple in
the Thai style at this Buddhist shrine.
In 1885 Arnold found
only a few Sivaite worshippers there, the ancient temple sadly
dilapidated, and the premises in the control of a Hindu Mahant.
In Ceylon, where Arnold interviewed the abbot of a Buddhist
monastery at Pandura, he gave to the abbot a few Bod hi leaves from
Buddh Gaya, and suggested that the shrine be placed in Buddhist
hands and restored.
idea at once.
The Ceylonese monks took up the
On their behalf Arnold wrote to the Viceroy of
India and to .other high officials.
All were friendly to the idea,

BOOK REVIEWS
providing it could "be accomplished cheaply and without
offending the Hindus." During the subsequent negoti~ttious the
Mahant kept raieing the price and final1y refused to part with
the shrine under any terms. What followed makes fascinating
reading. In brief, Arnold continued his efforts until1900 when,
blind and paralyzed, he coulc1 do nothing more. The Mahant
spent over a million rupees in fighting court orders, and Buddh
Gaya remained in Hindu control until 1953.
Arnold wrote a series of poems which were translations
and adapt11.tions of Sanskrit classics, the most important being
the Gita Govinda, the Katha Upanishad, and the Bhagavad Gita.
Mahatma Gandhi first read the Bhagavad Gita in this version.
"Today it is the only one of Arnold's poems that is stillregnlnrly
read and the one on which his future reputation must rest."
Having studied Turkish, Arbabic, and Persian, Arnold
wrote three long poems based on Islamic literature. The most
important, Pearls of the Faith, consisted of a rhymed discourse
of a legend connected with each of the ninety-nine names or
attributes of Allah.
As early as 1878, Arnold contemplated writing a narrative
poem on the life of Christ, to be called 1'7w Light of the
World. He accomplished this in 1890 while staying at Azabu,
Japan. It was not a success, although, according to the
biographer, the style was an improve-ment ovet• that of The
Light of Asia. "Everyone felt competent to criticise it,"
because of its omissions ancl additions. For example, he depicted
the three Magi who visited the infant Jesus as Indian Buddhists.
Moreover, by 1890 English taste was veering away from this
type of religious poetry .
.As a result of his stay in Japan, Arnold published three
books on the Japanese, one of them a play, Adzuma ( 1893 ),
based on a Japanese legend. Although it was in some ways his
masterpiece he could find no one to stage it. In 1954 this same
legend and plot appea1·ed in the cinema, The Gate of Hell.
ii9

izo
'
BOOK REVIEWS
His second wife, Fanny, an American, died in 1889. in
1892, while in Japan, Sir Edwin Arnold at the age of sixty
married a young woman, Tama Kurolmwa. They returned to
England, and after his death in 1904 she survived him by more
than fifty years.
What was his religion ?
He was an eclectic, In the opinion of his biographer,
"Arnold is best remembered as the author of 'Phe Light of Asia,
but The Light of the World is the most complete exposition of his
religions views. In this poem we see him as a man ''deeply
religious and magnificently unorthodox." "By 1889 he had
worked out for himself a full-scale synthesis of Buddhism,
Christianity, and Victorian science."
' '
K.8. C@ells

BOOK REVIEWS 121
Vaidya, P.L., 1Ja.uddhaoarna1·thasama1·aha. Nirnayasagara, Press,
Bombay, 1958. 314 pages.
This wn de is one of a pail· of collections of extracts from
the Sacred Books, one, of the J ainas pu blisherl some time previously,
ancl the other-this one-of the Buddhists. The extracts
are culled from the Pali as wen as the Sanskrit.
The majority
are Pali, though they have been published in Devanagari characters
for the convenience of Indian students.
The treatment of the subject is evi(lently historical.
The
book begins nevertheless with incidents which are not generally
accepted by critical Bnddh ists as historical facts, such as the incident
in a previous life of the Bucldha of his vow to eventually
become a Buddha, followed by a eulogy of the Bodhisattva from the
:Mahayanist Lalitavi8t'a1Yt, going on then to generally accepted
historical facts concc1'ning the master's life from the Mahava.aga
of tho Vinaya PitaTca, und the Mahaparin•ibbana 8utta from the
Suttanta P'italca. 'l'ho oxtrnctH then go on in their narration to
events after the Ma::;toJ·'s death; the conception of a Buddhist community
consisting uf Bhikkhu, Bhik1chnni, Upasalw, Upi1sil•a; then
exposes of the: Dhat·ma from the 'l'ipitrtlca Canon as well as later
works such as the Milincla Jlanha aTHl tho Ceylonese Vi.%tddMmagga.
Then various topics in connection with perBonnlities who
have shaped tho cause of Bucldhism arc discussed, such as King
Bimbisam of Mngudha and his son and successm·, Ajiirtasat1·u,
as well as Deva

RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS~'
233. The Life of the Buddha according to Thai Temple Paint-
= ~ "-'"\ '"" 1
ings, ~1-Jt91dl1'WW'Vl'Jirs,j't.J11l!~IJI11 m'l-!fl"l'W1J'I-lt-l'U'li1J~flfJ'Vll:i' '1-l
1 1
11T~l'Vlf"1l'VI't.J B.E. ~500. 184 pages.
In its own words," This volume has been published by the
United States Information Service and is presented to the people
of Thaihmd by the people of the United States on the occasion of
the observance of the year 2500 of the Buddhist Era." It contains
two appreciative messages, one called a salutation from the late
Prince VajirananavoiJS, Patriarch of the Kingdom and the other
called a preface from the President of the Ecclesiastical Council
as well as an introduction signed by "K.l!'.L." Although the
obviously competent editor has not signed himself beyond these
initials, it would not be difficult to guess his idontity, for but few
would be able to write such good literary English and at the same
time be equipped with a deep knowledge of Buddhism, especially
of the Mahayanist School of Thought.
The format of the work centres round the reproductions
of monastic murals, selected from odginals not only in Bangkok
monasteries but also those of Dhonlmri and Ay1.Hlhya. Some of
the most interesting of these murals therefore include those of
the XVIIIth centnry which have been restored with care an

124 RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
mankind. They lead us on then to a scene of his mother's marriage
with Prince Suddhoclhana of Kapilavatthn, her conception
after dreaming that the gods had brought down to her a white
elephant from heaven, then the birth, childhood nntl youth of
Prince Siddhattha, his forsaking the life of a householder for
asceticism, his cliscovery of the truth regarding life more usually
called the "Enlightenment," sevel'al incidents in his mission of
over 4 decades ancl finally his death and the division of his relics,
totalling altogether 65 pictures.
Each of these G5 pictures is accompanied by an explanatory
note in Siamese, written by members of the Holy Brotherhood.
It is worthy of note that of the G5, 62 are members of the
Mahanikaya, 2 fl·om the Dhammayut Reform School, and one
from the Vietnam clergy of Siam. There is also an English
translation of this text for each reproduction. At the end of the
book there is a note about the paintings which is a mine of
valuable information on artistic technique. We learn from this
note that the paintings are from 180 to 80 years old, though the
note admits that it is difficult to determine their age with exactitude.
They have been restored wit.h the utmost care and attention
to what should have been the original. Reproduction No. 57, for
instance, c1eserves every praise for the work of reRtorntion for,
looking at the original which is pdntecl in the note, nne would
hardly be able to imagine what the missing portions should be.
This note, as well as the rest of the subject-matter, is bilingual.
Following t.his note there is a chaptel' about the descriptions.
Then there al'e the individual notes of each of the reproductions.
It is to be regretted that the Siamese notes are often quite hadly
worded thol1gh the English ODeS are gooc1. One would be led to
think that the former are translated from the English notes.
The word" infinence" in the English is always a stumbling block
evet·ywhere it occurs. 'l'he Siamese rendering of this word in plates
8 and 34 seem to take it to mean" influential people." Thus in plate
34, the English" European influence is not to be denied" has been
rendered. as ~1Vlblj1uu lflll"l~lJ1J5l~'liUUll~
11 ~
Again in No. 42,

RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS 125
where the English rnns, "The bacl;gronnd is green and better
preserved than il1 ot,her paintings," the Siamese makes no sense,
" '1£ .!. .!. A ~ ""- ~2..-.!. I "
saying 'W'\.l~l~.fltlfJ'Jl~fliJ'JJ1lB1r~rmmn.J bfJtil1liJ1 • In a11 these
cases the Siamese version must have been bad translations rather
t,han the original notes. Some of the renutrl;s in English should
be corrrctr.d too. In No. liB, to mention but one place, where the
note says "nuns arc nt the bottom," it should really have been
said that they were l;lliklchuni, a female counterpart of the monlr,
no longer to be found. Some of the points raised hy the writer
of the notes are interesting, one of which is," It is unusual in
that the full body of the Buddha is shown, instead of only his
head protruding above the coils of the snake." As a matter of
fact it is nsnal to portray the full hody. 'rhe ones which have
just the head protrn

126 RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
which has been most creditably carried out; it also involves the
co-operation of nn artist who nnclcrstunds his subject from the
technical viewpoint of art as well as from the national conception
of Buddhist art and tradHion; the co-operation, too, of writers of
the descriptions from all over the country, often at long distances;
the direction and standardization of the translation of them, and
of course resources for the doubtless consi

RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
'rlum couw::J a diary written by her niece, the late
Prin(!l'i'H Swl

128 RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
intelligence were above the average of his or her contemporaries.
The author was often carried away by personal enthusiasm to
such an extent that one is prone to feel that the unnamed diarist
must have been a woman. King Ohulalonglwrn became interested
in this and wrote a running commentary on it with a memorandum
on the possibilities or identifying its author, cowing finally
to the conclusion that this might have been, with every likeliM
hood, the sister of King Rama I, Kromaluau Narindradevi, colM
loqnially known as "Oaokrok Wat Po," that is, 'rhe Princess of
Wat Po, from the fact that she lived near Wat Po or Wat Pra
Jetubon. 'fo her also was attributed the invention or perfection
of a dish called lchnorncib, which has become one of the highest
tests of Siamese culinary art.
236. Narouvijit, Pra: Report on a Siamese Diplomatic
},1-iss,ion to F?'Ctnce in B.E. 2404 in the Fourth reign ~W!Vl3-11tHVlfl
"'""' A ' ~
w:r~ru:J-:Jflr,]']fj lHJ~hJ~j~lft>jl~ Pracand Press, Bangkok, B.E.
2501. 65 pages.
This is the second odi tion of the work which was first
published in 192fl, and which formed the :30th volume of the
series of History P~tpers of the National Library. The present
edition has boon sponsored by the Pl'incC'SS of Nakon Svan.
Momra:iawous Kttkridclhi Pramoj, who contributes the introducM
tion, points out th::tt the choice of tho work is happy in that,
being a diplomatic report, its sponsor is one of the family which
has been long connected with the dip1omatic profession, both
her grandfather ancl father having held successively the portM
folio of foreign affairs in the 5th, 6th, and 7th reigns; while
tho late Princess to whom the publication is dedicated, besicles
having been born about the time of the despatch of the mission,
was a niece of the chief of the mission, who was her maternal
uncle. 'rhe anthol' or the report, one is tempted to add, was
also a Bnnnag, and therefore related not only to the chief of
the mission but also to the late Princess Dibyaratna and to the
Princess of Nakon Svan as well.

. . .
RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS 129
The subject matter may be thus summed up. The mission
was despatched in B. E. 2400 ( 1857 ) to Emperor Napoleon III.
It was transported to Europe by a French man"of-war.
The
·personnel of the mission consisted of three diplomats whose
staff amounted altogether to 18, with one officer and 9 gentlemen
of the Court in charge of the royal presents.
The King's autograph
to the Emperor was conveyed to the ship with customary
pomp and honour, and seen off on the French man-of-war by
Oaoprayiir Sri Snriyawo;us, then Minister of War and afterwards
Regent of the .Kingdom during King Chulalongkm•n's minority.
Its route was through Singapore, Calle, Aden, and Suez, from
whence the party travell.ed by train to Cairo, rejoining the ship
at Alexandria after having been entertained by the Egyptian
government. 'l'hen they crossed to France, landing at Toulon.
'l'hen they went by rail to Marseilles, Lyons and Paris. They
were received in audience by the Emperor at Fontainebleau,
shown into the rosidentia,l section of the palace where the
Empress received thorn personally and kissed the young son of
tho chief delegate. '!'heir sigbt"seeing in Paris included the
Hippodrome, the Mint, the .?joological Gardens, the Tuileries, and
the Palace of Versailles with its dependent sections such as the
'rrianon and le Hamean. The report comes to an abrupt end,
nothing else having been recovered.
Prince Damrong pointed out in the preface to the first
edition t,Jutt this report seemed to have been modelled upon
that of an earlier mission to Queen Victoria of Great Britain,
which included in its personnel the Mom Rfisjodai ·who came
back to write his famous niras, a descriptive love-poem setting
out the full itinerary of the mission and his own impressions of
the personalities its members met and all they saw in Enrope.
The report under review is, however in the Prince's opinion,
hardly up to the literary stnuclard of the other J•oport, which
might have been writen by the very author of the above-mentioned
Niras London.

130 RECENT, SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
The contents of the present second edition differ from
the first in that, whereas the first had merely the late Prince's
preface and a biography of the deceased LualJ Sri Saovarudh to
who~ it was dedicated, this edition has three introductions,
the first by the Fine Arts Department, the second by the sponsor
of the. publication who records her personal devotion to the late
Princess, and the third by Momrii.jawOlJS K. P~·ii.moj as mentioned
above. It has also the text of a memorial sermon in
which are aptly detailed the personality and abilities of the
late Princess. An interesting feature is the inclusion of a
photograph of the painting of the scene when the mission had
audience with the French Emperor at Fontainebleau, and a reproduction
of the photograph taken of the mission in France. It
might have been mentioned in addition that the original of the
painting depicting the audience at Fontainebleau now adorns
the northern wall of the Audience Hall of Ohakri in the Grand
Palace. Another might-have.-bcen is a table of contents, without
which the publication will not be as useful as it might have been.
237. In Dedication to Praya Teparatna Narind: Boyal
"" .!!.
Exhortations, etc. '\AJj~1Jj~:i'1l'liiJ1Vl '\AJnur~T1':ll1'llll1~ LJ'tl-.1
..... "' "" ,(
~ 1 j.,J fl fl '\AJ :r ~ J1'jj 'U '\AJ 'U 1i
"" ..!. .., "
1JJ'1J11C11J:i'flUI.'1'1
~
.!!. A
lll(.'l ~ 11 'l J 'il fl1l :r 'El ~ L .:J U Vl J' 1 ~ 'fJ 1l-l "] tl-.1 VI IC11J -.1
Pracancl Press, Bangkok, B.E. 2502. 47 pages.
This publication consists of several items by various
writers, with the nsual features of a cremation book, such as a
biography, a few valedictory notes, a short narrative of the
late nobleman's antececlants, starting hom Cao Prayii. Ratnadhibd,
a Minister of Agriculture under King Chulalonglwrn.
Then follows what may be termed as the subject matter,
consisting of the famous essay on Unity by King ChulalongkQl'n
(rev. in these columnH, JSS XXXVI, 2, pp. 180-2 ); a royal
autograph letter to King (then Crown Prince) Vajiravudh in
1895, exhorting him in his new standing of Heir to the rnll'one;
a royal exhortation again by King Chnlalonglwrn, given to his

RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS 131
four eldest sons who were sent to Europe for their education in
1885. 'l'he book is brought up at the end by the text of a
lecture by Lua1J Boribal Buribhand on "'l'he Bank-notes of
Siam," tracing tho history of the successive issues of Bank Notes
from the first issue by King Monglmt in 1862 to the issue of
1918 in the sixth reign.
238. Sathienlroses: Thai seasonal customs
d. ...
~m.l 1 'lfl1JL'V1Mn1tl Pracand Presf!, Bangkok, B.E. 2499. 250 pages.
This publication was sponsored and published by Sanan
Bunyasiribhandhn, proprietor of the Pracand Press in dedication
to his father, Siew Bunyasiribhandhu on the occasion of the creniation
of his remains at Wat Mahabriclharam in December 1956.
Sathienkoses points out in the preface that these seasonal customs
prevail in central Siam. They started as practices carried out
from time to time till they became stereotyped into traditions.
Commencing his description with the traditional new year
genera1ly observed by the people in most countries of south-east
Asia in April, he explains the astronomical significance of SoiJkrant
which has been adoptecl popularly as the New Year. It is
a season of rejoicing, occuring between the 13th and the 15th of
April, being perhaps the only festival which is not calculated by
the lunar calendar, which is naturally a better guide for the
seasons than the solar one among agricultural pe01)le. Its calculation
has acquired the support of the allegory of Kapila and his
daughters which has given it a mythical aspect. A detailed
description of the various aspects of this festival is given.
Appended to the chapter on the New Year are festivals
of the 6th and the 7th lunar months (TOughly May and June),
among which the most widely celebrntecl is the observance of the
Vi~akha commemorating the coincident elate of the birth, enlightenment
and death of the Buddha.
The second chapter deals with the Khaovassa, i.e., commencement
of the rains, often referred to in English as Buddhist
Lent, perhaps on account of the retreat which Buddhist monks are
enjoined to go into.

132 RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
In the third chapter we are tohl about the Sarada, a
festival

Service- ru po.pula1~
country.
RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS 133
form of merit-making practiced all over the
This description commences with the generalisation that
such services are invariably accompanied by social amenities, l:lnch
as the provision of food and refreshments for those: who assist in
the function and for guests, a custom which: the author traces back
to old India. Then come descriptions of the features of such
services, the preparation, and the invitation to monks to come
and chant the benediction in the eyening, to be followed by
another visit by them in the morning, after which they are served
with food within the prescribed period before the hour of noon.
The service consists of the chanting of passages from the sacred
texts, usua1ly stanzas of benediction. A useful analysis is given
of these texts, though one feature is lacking-the chanting in solo
of prefaces often of a high poetical cliction prior to each of the
passages which are recited by tho whole chapter of the clel'gy
assembled.
240. Sathienkoses: Bened1:ctm•y Services
o/!.!:
~ fJ Wl j.J '1-ll'll'CH.I ~ 'W '.i' ~ RnlJrnalJdharm Press, Bangkok, B.E. 2502. 75
pages.
This work was published in dedication to the late Majol'
Sarasidd hi, a distinguished in fan try guards officer who lost his
career fighting for what he thought to have l1een the cause of
his King and Country. He then turned to politics for a short
time before he died at the age of 64.
The subject-matter of the book iEl identical with the last
part of the bool{ just reviewed ( 239 ).
I
241. Vanarat, Somdec Pra: Me1·it-malcing
Pracand Press, Bangkok, B.E. 2499, pp. 1-15.
The little pamphlet, published by Mr. Sanan Bunyasiri·
bhandhn of the Pracancl Press to commemorate the cremation of
his father's remains, is a collection of information regarding
merit-maldng as practised by Siamese nationals. It deserves
attention on account of its succinct presentation.
0
Buddhism

134 RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
inculcates self-training and an intelligent valuation of their re.
ligion by those who profess it; but it also encourages deeds of
chadty and kindness. 'fhis latte1' is obviously easier to practise
than self-training and intellectufl,lism. Hence its widespreafl
practice. Under modern conditions of living, nevertheless, it is
becoming hat·der to 'make merit' through charity and liberality
because the cost o·f livil1g is steadily rising all over in every
community.
The author was a famous Lord Abbot of Wat. :Mahadhatu
who was widely esteemed as a preacher and a disciplinarian besides
being a scholar and an able administrator in the Church. He was
a Chino-Siamese who had a brilliant career. His treatment of the
subject is a popular one, taldng in such functions in connection
with death as wel1 as with more auspicious occasions, such as a
birthday, etc. Contt'!l.l'Y to many othet' works of a similar nature,
it sums up what should be known about merit-making, explaining
the reasons whereof in a clear and succinct enough manner to render
unnecessary wading through hundreds of pages of anthorita.
tive texts on the subject,
Since his death there hnve been two holders of this title,
the present holder being the President of the Ecclesiastical Council
and Lord Abbot of Wat Bencamabopit.
, '
242. King Rama VI: Pra Ruav 'WJ'~ji"J~ and The Triumph
.!....,
of Riaht 'fijj'l--J~l-l~il Kl'ishnapalwrn Press, Bangl{Qk, B.E. 2502.
T.he memorial volume dedicated to the late Pra Voravudh
consists of many items of no particular general interest save the
material of two dramas from the pen of King Rama VI. The first
of these is a dialogue-drama on the theme of the ancient hero,
:f>ra Rnau, King of Snkhodaya, with the usual plot which need
not be reiterated here. The second is a rat•e work, not generally
known, called Tho Td·umph of Rioht. Though not a work of very
high merit, its plot should be given becn.nse of its obscurity.
Devasatrn, the 'enemy of the gods' anc1 his friend Narasatrn,
'enemy of men,' invade with their forces the heavenly realm of

135
the. gods out of jealousy and give free rein to plunder and rape.
Skanda, god of war, with his colleagues in heaven defend their
realm and put the wicked forces to defeat.
243. Pariyativedi, Pra : The Tipitaka in abbreviated translations.
VJj~lPlj~lJ'illlll~U'EJ Sivaporn Co. Ltd., Bangkok, B.E.
2501. pp. 1-372.
'l'his volume is of co'urse only a part of a big whole and
concerns just the Digha Nilcaya of the Suttanta P~talca. 'l'hat there
should be a synopsis of the Digha Nilcaya, which is the most
important. historically, is obvious. 'l'he work has, however,
been designated Pra 'l'raipidolc pl'e yo, which would give the
impression of a translation. But the work is not a translati'on.
It is really a succession of abbreviated summaries of the Digha
Nilcaya. As a synopsis, however, it should be useful.
The publication came into being as tt complimentary memento
of the celebration of the sixth cycle of age of the Ven.
Pra " Paiiiiabisala-Thera, head-abbot of the monastery of Padumavanaram,
to which the author belongs.
244. Bodhinanda, S. : Lectttres on the History of B'Uddhism
0 "''I> "
fl11JHtl1'!.11.lT:IJPlf11~m'Wj:'V'JVJ'llfi1thl1
1
sity Press, Bangkok, B.E. 2500. pp. 1-352.
King Mongkut Univer-
'l'hese lectures, delivered at the King Monglmt University,
seem to include a wide range of topics beside the history of
Buddhism in the ordinary se11se of the word. The first chapter
deals with the origin of sects from the time of the Buddha.
These differences of opinion became more pronounced with the
Master's death. It was therefore deemed advisable to hold the
First Council soon afterwards. Successive chapters tell us of
further development and later Councils. Among other topics, our
history discusses the non-employment by the Buddha of the
literary languages of coutemJJOl'ary India, and his preference for
a kind of Magaclhi; the mode of reckoning the Buddhist era; and
a great deal of matter hitherto untouched in Church histories,

136 RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
perhaps from the lack of general knowledge by the writers of old.
The author of the history under review presents a liberal and
intelligent treatment of historical aspects, bringing in external
evidences which have since become known, such as the contemporary
history of India, the invasion of the Greeks under
Alexander the Great, the rise of the Nanda, Maurya, Sunga and
Kushana dynasties, the School of thought of Sravasti and -the
consequen,t development of Mahayii.nisrn. 'l'hen he goes on to the
spread of the faith to .Ceylon in the form of Tberavadism and its
canon including the Abh,idhamma.
There is a ·bibliography at the end; but, as usual, no index,
which is a g·reat pity, especially when we consider the fact that
it is the orily book of reference in Siamese on this subject.
Cj)_

AccESSIONs TO THE UBRARY
from cfluly to 'CJ)ecember 1958
Sabah Story ( 1957 ).
Brunei Darus-Salam.
Books
Malcolm Macdonald: Borneo People ( 195'7 ).
Presented by Mr. Oonrad Parkman.
M.C.Ff. Sheppard: The Adventures of Hang Tutth.
Tom Har1·isson: Singing Pre-History.
Graham Irwin : Nineteenth-Century Borneo ( 1955 ).
M.B. Lewis: A Handbook of Malay Script ( 1954 ).
'l'ony Beamish: The Arts of Malaya.
R.O. Winstedt: Malay Grammar ( 1939 ).
O.T. Dussek, Ahmad Murad Bin Nasrucldin and A.E. Coope:
A Graduated Malay Reader ( 1953 ).
Agnes Keith: Land Below the Wind ( 1953 ).
Anthony Hill: Divel'Sion in Malaya ( 1948 ).
Hikayat Pelandok Jenaka ( 1955 ).
Hikayat Ahcln1lah, Bin Abdul, Kaclir Munshi ( Hl49 ).
Tuat·an Adat: Some Customs of the Dusuns of Tuaran, West
Coast Residency, North Borneo ( 1953 ).
Mnrnt Aclat : Customs Regulating Inheritance amongst the
Dnsun Tribes in the Coastal Plains of Pntatan and Paper
( 1953 ).
Presented by Mr. Charles Duncan, A.U.A. Lwnguage Centre.
Tom Harrission: Carbon Dated Palaeoliths from Borneo.
Bibliography of Thailand ( 1956 ).
UNESCO Activities in Japan ( 1957 ).
·Saranrom No. 10, February 1958 ( rrhai ).

lSS
ACCESSIONS TO THE LIBRARY
A.lf. G. Johnels: On the Development and Morphology of the
Skeleton on the Head of Petromyzon ( 1958 ).
Richard Reyment: On the Stratigraphy and Pal[Leontology of
Nigeria and the Cameroons British West Africa ( 1956 ).
Yahya Ben Adam's Kitab AL Kharaj : Taxation in Islam, Vol. I.
Poems on Ramalden, inscribed in the Temple of the Emerald
Buddha ( 1958) (Thai).
King Chulalongkorn: Royal Family in Thailand ( 1958) (Thai).
H.H. Prince Vajirayannawong: Sermons ( 1958) (Thai).
1-I.I-I. Prince Vajirayannawong: Buddhism ( 1958) ( 'fhai ).
Way to Peace ( 1958) (Thai).
Sermons for the Late Phya Burnt Ratana Ratcha Phanlob ( 1958)
(Thai).
Burut Rat, Stodes Concerning the J_.~a.te
Ratcha Phanlop ( 1958) (Thai).
Phya Burnt Ratnna
Private !)etters of King Chu1alongkorn to Queen Sauwapha
clnring his First Trip to Europe in 1897, Part I ( 1958)
(Thai).
Three Months in Jetavan ( 1958) (Thai).
The Annual Fair of Wat Phra Jetnphon in 1958 (Thai).
Luanda ( Oidade Portuguesa Fundarla por Paulo Dias de Novais
em 1575 ).
Angola: Portuguese Province in Africa ( 1953 ).
Sibpan Sonakul: Thai History in Ratanakosin Period (Thai).
Dr. Raghn Vira and Shri K.N. Dave: India Scientific Nomenclature
of Birds of India, Burma and Ceylon.
A.. Lnytjes: Ret Landbouwknndige Onderzoek Door de Rockefeller
Foundation (Rockefeller Foundation's Activities in the
Field of Agriculture Research) ( 1958 ).
Ir. W. Spoon: White Spot in Ghana-Cacao (White Spot in
Ghana-Cocoa) ( 1958 ).
Indo-Pacific Fisheries OOlmcil Proceedings, 6th Session, Tokyo,
Japan, 30th September- 14th October, 1955, Section I ( 1957 ).

ACCESSIONS TO THE LIBRARY 139
Indo-Pacific Fisheries Council Proceedings, 6th Session, 'l'okyo,
Japan, 30th September- 14th October 1955, Sections II and
III (1956).
Dr. W.O. Klein : De Congolese Elite ( 1957 ).
Dr. P. Van Ernst: In De Ban Der Vooronders ( 1958 ).
L. Cadiore: Syntax.e de la Langue Victnamienne ( 19!i8 ).
L'Art del Gandhara in Paldstan E.I. Suoi Incontri Con l'Arte
Dell' Asia Centrale ( 1958 ).
Hazel M. Hauck, Saovanee Sudsaneh and Jane R. Hanks: Food
Habits and Nutrient Intakes in a Siamese Rice Village Studies
in Bangchan, 1952- 1954.
John E. de Young: Village Life in Modern Thailand ( 1955 ).
G, William Skinner: Chinese Society in Thailand: an Analytical
History. ( 1957 ).
H.G. Qnaritch Wales: Pre-history and Religion in South-East
Asia ( 1957 ).
Bernard-Philippe Groslier: Angkor Hommes et Pierres ( 1956 ).
The Life of the Buddha ( 1957 ).
A.B. Griswold: Dated Buddha Images of Northern Siam ( 1957 ).
Reginald Le May: The Cult.nre of South-East Asia ( 1957 ).
John Brown Mason and H. Carroll Parish: Thailand Bibliography
( 1958 ).
Ir. W. Spoon: Etherische Olien Van Nienw-Gninea (Essential
Oils from New Guinea) ( 1958 ),
Traditional Cultures in South-East Asia ( 1958 ).
Charles David Sheldon: The Rise of the Merchant Class in
Tokugawa Japan 1600- 1868 ( 1958 ).
Howard Fast: The Naked Gocl ( 1957 ).
Louis Malleret: Apergn d'un Demi-Siecle cle Travaux Scientifiqnes
a l'Ecole Fran

140 ACCESSIONS TO THE LIBRARY
Periodicals
Acta Biologica Venezuelica, Vol. 2, Arts. 4- 17.
American Museum of Natural History, Bulletin of the, Vol. 115,
Arts. 1-4.
Ananai, the, Vol. IX, No. 6.
Annual Bibliography of India A1·chaeology for the Year 1944-1953,
Vol. XVI.
Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian
Institution, 1957.
Archiv Orientalni, 26/2, 26/3, 1958.
Arkiv for Zoologi, Andra Serien, Band U, Haft 3- 4.
Arts Asiatiqnes, Tome IV, Fasc. 3-4.
Asian Bibliography, Vol. YII, No. 1.
Asian Studies, the Journal of, Vol. XVII, Nos. 4, 5.
Asiatique Journal, Tome CCXLV, Fasc. Nos. 2- 3.
Basseler-Archiv, Neue Fo1ge, Band VI, Heft 1.
Bibliogra1)hy of Scientific Publications of South & South East
Asia, Vol. 4, Nos. 6- 10; Vol. 3 (Index) 1957.
Bibliography of the Humanistic Studies and Social Relations;
No. II ( 1953- 54).
Bombay NatUl'al History Society, Journal of the, Vol. 55, Nos. L-2;
Index and Title Page, Vol. 52, Nos. 1, 2 & a, 4.
Breviora, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Nos .. 86..,.. 96.
Burma Research Society, Jonmal of the, Vol. XL, Pt. II.
China Today, No. 6.
Department of Archaeology and AnthropoJogy, Bn11

ACCESSIONS TO THE LlBRARY
t4l
Free China Review, Vol. VIII, No, 10,
Health Bulletin, (Thai), 28th Year, Vol. 1- 3.
India QIHtrt~rly, Vol. XIV, Nos. 1 ~ 2.
Indian and Buddhist Studies, Special Supplementary Issue
(Revised and Enlarged)., Vol. 6, Nos. 1- 2;.
Indo-Asian Culture, the, Vol. VI, No. 4; Vol. VII, No. 1.
Insdoc List, Vol. 5, No. 9.
Insdoc Report 1957- 58.
Institute for Oriental Culture, the Memoirs of the, Nos. 14- 15.
Institute of Ethnology Academia Sinica, Bulletin of the, No. 4.
Institute of Traditional Cultures 1
Ma.dras 1958, Bulletin of the,
Instituto de Bi.ologia, A..nales del., Tomo XXVIII, Nuweros I Y 2.
Internationf\1 Confluence of Orienta lists in Japa,n, th,e Trt\nl:l~ctious
of, No. II, 1958.
Japan Annual of Law and Politics, the, No. 3, 1955; No. 4, 1~56.
Japan Science Review Economic Sciences, No.2, 1955; No. 4, 1957.
Japan Science Review Law and Politics, the, No.6, 1953; No. 7,
1954.
Japan Science Review Literature, Philosophy and History, the,
Vol. G-9, 1958.
Japanese Journal of Ethnology, the, Vo1. 22, Nos. 1-2.
Koninklijk Instituut Voor de Tropen Amsterdam, Zeven En
Veertigste Jaarverslag, 1957.
Macljalrth Ilm A1am Untnk Indonesia, Vol. 113.
Maha Boclhi, the, Vol. 66, Nos. 6-11.
Malayan Branch Royal Asiatic Society, Journal of the, Vol,
XXVIII, Pts. 1, 2, 4.
Microentomology, Vol. 23, Pts. 1- 2.
MJ tt~ilnng a us dam Staatliche:n 1Y.I1,1SE;!nlU fUr 'N at\wkun~~ lll
Stuttgart Nrs. 335- 339.

142 ACCESSIONS TO THE LIBRARY
Museum National cl'Histoire Naturelle, Bulletin du, 2e Serie,
Tome XXX, Nos. 1-4.
Museum of Oompa1·ative Zoology at Harvard College, Bulletin of
the, Vol. 118, Nos. 1- 7; Vol. 119, Nos. 1- 5.
Museum of l!'ine Arts, Boston, Bulletin, Vol. LVI, Nos. 303-304.
Muslim World, the, Vol. XLVIII, Nos. 3- 4.
Natur Und Volk, Band 88, Heft 5-8.
Newsletter, Vol. IX, No. 1.
Nytt Magasin for Botanikk, Vol. G, 1958.
Orient Occident, Vol. l, Nos. 1 - 4.
Orient Culture, No. 25.
Pacific Science, Vol. XII,, Nos. 3-4.
Philippine Social Sciences and Humanities, Vol. XXII, Nos. 1- 4.
Programme des Com•s, Tiniversite Catholique de Louvain
1958-1959.
Raffles Museum, Memoirs of the, Nos. 2- 3.
Rencontre Orient- Occident 3me Annee, No. 1..
Research Department of the Toyo Bunko, Memoirs of the, (The
01'iental Librm•y ), No. 17, 1958.
Review of Publications, September, 1958.
Revue Hm·ticole de 1' Algerie, G2me Annee No. 2, 4, 5.
Sarawak Museum Journal, the, Vol. VIII, No. 11.
School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London,
Bulletin of the, Vol. XXI, Pts. 2- 3.
Science Library Bibliographical Sel'ies, No. 758.
Signa1etiqne d'Entomo1ogie Medicale et Veterinaire, Bulletin,
Vol. No. 3 Premiere Partie, Vol. No. 3, Deuxieme Partie.
Sillman Journal, Vol. V, No. 1.
Siriraj Hospital Gazette, (Thai), 9th Year, Vol. 9, Nos. 11-12;
lOth Year, Vol. 10, Nos. 1- 2.
Societe des Etudes Indochinoises, Nouvelle Serie, Bulletin de la,
Tome XXXIII, No. 1 et 2.

ACCESSIONS TO 'r'I:IE LIBRARY
Southeast Asian History, Bulletin of the, No. 1.
Stanford Ichthyological Bulletin, Vol. 7, No. 3.
Stnttgarter Beitrage Znr Natnrlmnde, ans dem Staatlichen
Museum fur Naturkunde in Stuttgart, Nrs. 1- 15.
Tamil Culture, Vol. VII, Nos. 1-2.
'rohokaku, Nos. 15 -16.
Toyo Gakuho, Vol. XXXX, No.4.
Tropical Abstracts, Vol. XIII, Nos. 6-10.
United States National Musenm, Proceedings of the, Vol. 107,
No. 3390; Vol. 108, 3392- 3402, 3404.
United States National Museum, Smithsonian Institution, Bulletin
212, 1958.
Universitas, Vol. 2, Nos. 2- 3.
University of California Publications in Entomology, Vol. 14,
Nos. 2-4.
143

!
'l

SPECIAL PRESENTATION OF PUBliCATIONS
BY THE AMBASSADOR OF INDIA
On Jnue 10, 1959, His Excellency Mr. Anand Mohan
Sahay, Ambassador of India, presented to the Siam Society
forty-eight valuable publications on Indian subjects. His Highness,
Prince Dhani Nivat, Kromamun Birlyalahh, President of
the Siam Society, accepted the publications for tlw Societ.y. The
titles of these publications, together with the names of the
authors or publishers of each, are as follows:
Biographies
1-8. "'I' he Mahatma" 8 volumes S.G. Tendullmr
9. Mahayogi R.R. Diwarkar
10. 'l'he Life of Burlclha
11. Siddhartlut man of peace
Art and Architecture
12.. Indian Architecture
13. On Art
14. Moghnl Miniatures
15. The Hindu View of Art
Ui. 'l'he Charm of Indo-Islamic
Architecture
17. Alpolla
lS. 'l'lw Soc.:htl l!'unctiou of Al't
19. Classical Indian SculpturP
20. Indian MPtal Sculpture
Philosophy and Culture
21.. At the Feet of Mahatma Gandhi
22. The National Culture of India
23. Indian Philosophy
24. Sanskrit & Onlture
25. 'l'he Legacy of India
2G. Gandhi to Vinobha
27. The Power of Non-Violence
Edward J. 'l'homas
Harindranath
Chattopaclhyaya
0.0. Ga11gcly
Nandlal Bose
Lalit Kala Academy
Mu1kh Raj Anand
.Tohn Terry
'l'apan :Mohan Chatterji
Raclhakamal Mukerjee
Chintamoni Kar
Ohintamoni Kar
Rajenc1ra l'rasarl
Dr. S. A bid Hussain
Jlr. S. Rallha1;:rislnwn
Goldstud:.c1'
G.'l'. Gal'l'att
Philip Leon
Richard l3. Gregg

146 SPECIAL PRESENTATION OF PUBLICATIONS
28. Non-Violence in Peace and
War-Volume I
29. -do- Volume II
30. Tho Hnmnn Oyc1o
iH. The Life Diviue
32. Great Systems of Yoga
M.K. Gu.ndhi
1\I.K. Gandhi
Sri Aurobinclo
Sl'i Aurobinclo
Ernest Wood
Music and Dance
a3. Dance of India
34. Language of Katlwlmli
B5. The Dance in India
i~6. Ragas and Raginis
Literature
B7. Contemporary Inlliau
Literature
3:). KalilhtStL- u study
Religion
B9. The Gospel of Sri Barnakrishnan
40. 'rhe Dhmnmapada
41. Essential Unity of all
Religions
4':>.
Vedanta for the Western
World.
4B. The natlll'e nf man according
to Vedanta
4- 1 • Eni:ltern Religions and
Western Thought.
4G. Social and Religious Li:Ee
in the Grihya Sutras
·1G. The Principal Upani::;hads
Economics
Projesh Banerji
Prem Kumar
Faubion Bowers
O.C. Gangoly
Sahitya Akadomi
P1·of. G.C. Jhala
Swami NikhilanmHla
Dr. S. R

OBITUARY
£uang (!Jhaluapani cf)risilavisuddhi
It is with sincere regret that we have to record the passing
of our col] eagtle, Luang Ohakrapani STisilavisuddhi, mem bH for
several years of our Council who at one t.ime carried out the
onerous duties of ouT Hon. Secretary. Of a family of lawyers,
the lat.e Luang Ohakraprmi, born as Visnddh Krairiksl1, was sent
to be educated in England. He entered Queen's College, Oxford,
made himself a valuable member of that institution, and eventually
was graduatecl in the Final Honour School of .Jurisp1•udence. He
combined his studies at the University with thofle in the legal field
at the Middle Temple, J_,ondon, ancl he was also called to the English
Bar. Returning to his motherland, he adopted the legal profession,
rising rapidly in it till he became a prominent member of the
Di1m Court of Final Appeal. Luang Ohakrapani took care not to
neglect the social n,ncl non-professio1wl sides of his life. In his
cultural and executive activities on behalf of the Siam Society,
of which he indeed deserved to be regarded as an ideal member,
he was always attentive and most punetilious in whatever duty
was required of him.

ANNUAL REPORT FOR 1958
The Annual General Meeting terminating the year 1957
was held at the Society's Home, GO Asoka Road, Bangkapi on
Monday, lOth March 1958, with II.H. Prince Prem Pnrachatra,
Senior Vice-President, in the chair, the President being away
in attendance upon their Majesties on their tom of the north.
The Meeting unanimously re-elected H.H. Prince Dhani
Nivat, Kromamun Bidyalabh, as President of the Siam Society
for 1958, and the old Council was re-elected en bloc with the
addition of Mr. W. Wheaton who was acting for the Honorary
Editor of the Journal while the latter was absent on home leave.
'l'he Council upon taldng office appointed the following
standing committees:-
1) Finance:
The Senior Vice-P1·esident ( H.H. Prince Prem Purachatra
), Chairman,
The Honorary Treasurer,
The Honorary Secretary.
2) Editorial:
The Honorary Editor of the ,Journal (Mr. Cecil L.
Sanford), Oha.irman,
H.H. Prince Dhani Niv[lt, Kromamun Biclyalabh,
1\I r. Rnbert Swann,
H.E. Monsieur G. Seidenfaden,
Miss P. Liangpibul.
3 ) Exchange:
H.S.T-I. Prince Snhhaclradis Dis1m1, Chairman,
Phya Annrnan Rajadhon, Honorary Librarian,
I-I.H. Prince Snkhnmnbhinand.
4) Natural History:
Lt. General Phya. Snlwiclhan Nidhes, Chairman,
I-I.E. Monsieur G. Seiclenfaden, Honorary Euitor of
the Natural History Bulletin,
H.S.H. Prince Piyarangsit Rangsit.

HiO ANNUAL HEPORT FOH 19!18
5) Travel:
1\'Ir. Sanya Dhannasaldi, Chairman,
H.S.H. Prince Ajavaclis Di::;knl,
M.R Snmonajati Swnsuikn 1,
The Honorary Secretary.
Mr. Cecil L. Sanford was unanimously re-elected l1y the
Council ns Honorm·y Eclitor of the Journal.
In May 1958 onr Honorary 'l:reasnrcr, Mr. Jorgen IIolm,
had to leave for Denmark on account of illness and he was
tempor~c1·i\y replaced by Mr. U. Unclerlanrl of the Royal
Norweginn Legation, who managPd the Society's accounts in a
ver~· competent rnanne1·. The Society was fortunate enough to
have the senicfl of Mr . . Jorgen Holm again when he, fully
recovering from his ailment, returned t.o Bangkok in November
of the same year.
It was a pleasure to the Council to see the return of
Mr. J.J. Boeles, our Corresponding Member, to this country in
the middle of the year. Because :Mr. Boeles, who had previously
been an active Council member, continued to talm a keen interest
in the Society's activities, he was co-opted as member of the
Council in August 18!58.
The Council held eleven business meetings during the
year under review. Ten meetings took place in the President's
house in Pechabnri Road and one meeting in the Society's Home
in Bangkapi.
The Society's membership up to the end of 1958 was as
follows:
Royal Patron and Vice-Patrons 3
Honorary Members 9
Corresponding Members 15
I

ANNUAL REPORT FOR 1958 151
Deaths, however, dealt a heavy blow to the Society. The
untimely death of onr former Honorary Secretary, Mr. Robin
Penman, occurred on 19th June 1958, and two of onr Hono~·ary
Members passecl away, namely: Major Erik Soidenfaden and Sir
Walter Williamson. Luang Chnkrapani, a former Honorary
Secretary and several times member of the Council, also died.
The Society mourns their loss greatly.
'!'he Honorary Secretaryship of the Society has been tab~n
over by H.S.H. Prince Ajavadis Diskul, who was Mr. Robin
Penman's predecessor in this post, and who now retains at the
same time his post of a Vice-President.
The financial standing of the Society can f our Journal, the Council
decided to increase the pnh1ieation of the Journal from 800 copies
to 1,000 copies. In 1%8 the Society issuod two numbers of the
;Journal, namely: Vnlnnw 41'•, Pad 1 ( .Tnne Hl~lS) and Volume 41;,
Part 2 (November 1 !lfiR ). It also puhli~IH·d "'l'he 'l'hai Peoples"
by the late Ma.ior "Erik Scilleuiadeu. It is hoped~ that in the
following year tlH" Sncirty will be alJlc tn publish at least mwtlwr
issue of the Natural History Bulletin as well as further numbers
of the .Jon rnal.
In Juno 19fJ8, the Society was J'Pquc·stecl by and gave its
permission to the 'l'hai 1~rnbassy in Copenhagt•u to publish extracts
from the .Journal, Volume 31, l'nrt 1 ( J\Tareb l~li~

152 ANNUAL REPORT FOR 1958
Some of our senior officers trave1lcd abroa

ANNUAL REPORT FOR 1958 153
On 5th January 1959
:Mr. Cecil Hobbs lectured on
"The Service-Motive of the
Ubrary of Congress. "
On 23rd January 1959 Mom Rajawongse Sumonajati
Swasdilml lectured on "King
Naresuan the GreQ,t-1590/1605
A.D."
On 24th February 1959 An exhibition of topical films of
Siamese Life by the U.S.I.S.
Natural History Section's Meeting:
Excursions :
On 11th June 1959
Mr. R. Balakrishnan B.A., B.Sc.
lectured on "Raw Materials of
Agriculture and Industrial Development
in Thailand-The Present
and the Future."
On lOth August 1951-1 J Excursion by bus to Nakhon
Fathom.
On 28th December 1958 Excursion to Wat Raj-m·os, Wat
Nangnong and Wat Sai in ThouburL
On hit 'Feln·ua!'Y 1959
Excursi(Hl by bns to the towns
of U-tbong, Supanbnri, Wat
Mahathat and King Naresnan's
Victory Monument at Don Ohedi.

THE SIAM
FINANCIAL RESUME
Receipts
Subscriptions
Ordinary members, current year
Ordinary members, overdue accounts
Life members
Sale of publications
:34,317.21
2,GOfi.30
2i\,5i39.00
Baht G0,462.51
The Journal
Natural B:istot·y Bulletin
Florae Siamensis Enumeratio
Credner's observations
Reprint: Khao Phra Vihar
Commemorative publication
E. Seid.enfaden: 'l'he Thai Peoples I
Total cost of production 24,336.00
Donation Asia Foundation 20,000.00
Sale in 1958
Sundry publicatior1s
4,336.00
11,945.00
10,886.2-1
1,69:1.50
880.49
22.40
4,492.42
8,512.7B
7,G09.00
525.0:> Baht 34,621.83
Sundry receipts
Bank interest
Baht 11,642.66
Baht 106,727.00

'SOCIETY
, 'FOR THE YEAR 1958
Expenditure
!Home Maintenance
Salary to caretaker
1,600.00
Fire insurance
2,048,00
Electricity supply
652.60
White ants control
250.00
Purchase and maintenance of furniture
2,370.00
Mise, expenses
J
;Library:
Salary to. clerks
5,800.00
Fire insurance
798.76
Misc. expenses
I
iSecretarial & Editorial:
I
:J
.! Station!).ry and Office supplies
7,095,90
Postage and Delivery expenses
4,525.70
Revenue stamps
470.00
Expenses for lectures
1,771.10
Olerks assistance
1,120.00
Printing of publications
17,785.00
Representation expenses
150.00
Property taxes
3,932.50
Misc. expenses
i
!Excess of receipts over expenditure
---
1
·I
5,320.50 Baht 12,241.10
1,365.00 Baht 7,~63.76
394.75 Baht 37,244.95
Baht 49,277.19
Baht 106,727.00
Examined and found to agree with books and vouchers.
P. Banijya Sara Vides
Honora1'Y Auditor

THE SIAM
BALANCE SHEET AS OF
Liabilities
Creditors :
Subscriptions prepaid
Reserves:
Surplus:
General Reserve
Reserve for repairs
Reserve for book purchases 2,246.69
Expenses dmin g 1958 487.20
Reserve for gratn:ties to library asst.
Reserve for excursions
Balance brought forwaru from last 1957
Excess of receipts over expenditure in 1958
Baht 2,300.00
8,509.40
5,929.26
1,759.49
1,050.00 Baht 17,248.15
Baht 953.87
122,193.83
49,277.19 Baht 171,471.02
Funds for Research FeiJowship:
Capital
Donations
7,858.94
100.00 Baht 7,958.94
Baht 199,931.98
Bangkok,
' '
t·
[ ~

SOCIETY
DECEMBER 31ST, 1958
Assets
Cash & Banks:
Cash at hand
Siam Commercial Bank Ltd.
Bank for Co-operatives, Fixed deposit
Nationale Handelsbank, Fixed deposit
Hongkong & Shanghai Banking Corp.,
Fixed deposit
Bangkok Bank of Commerce, :Fixed dep.
343.65
34,858.42
47,695.29
65,659.62
26,375.00
25,000.00 Baht 199,931.98
Baht 199,931.98
January 12th, 19159
~·Holm
1Cxamined and found to agree with books and vouchers.
P. Banijya Sara Vides
Jfa'l'ch Bth! 19MJ

Patron Hia Majesty the King
Vice-Patrons Her Majesty Queen Harnbai Barni
Her Royal Highnaaa the Princess of Songkblii.
THE COUNCIL OF THE SIAM SOCIETY FOR
1959
1) :EUI. Prince Dhaui Nivat,
Kromaroun Bidyalabh
President
2) H.H. Prince Prem Purachatra Senior Vice-President
3) B.J!J. Chao Phyii, Sri Dharmadhibea Vice-President
4) H.S.H. Prince Ajavadia Dislml VicemPresident & Honorary Secretary
5) .H.S.R. Princess Marayat Diakul Assistant Honorary Secretary
6) Mr. Jorgen Holm. Honorary 'l'reasnrer
7 ) Phya Anuro.an Rajadhon Honorary Librarian
8) Mr. Cecil h Sanford Honorary Editor of the ,Journal
9) H;E. Monsieur Hans Ebbe Munck Honol'ary Editor of the
Natural History Bulletin
10) M. Ge~e1•al Phyii. Salwidhan Nidhes Leader of the Natural History Section
. . . . - ' .
;. H) Mr. Saoya Dharmasakti Leader o£ the 'l'ravel Section
~2) H.S.H. l,'lrince Snbhadradia Dislml Chairman of the Exchange Committee
Mom Luang Pin Malakul, M.A .
....... .., •• TJ... Prince Piy~uangsit Hangsit
P!·ince Snkhumabhinand

VOLUME XLVII Part 2 November 1959
THE
J URNAL
OF THE
I
(JSS)
I T
BANGKOK
2502

With the Compliments of
'Jvfr. J.J. 'Boeles
'Dec 1996
L~
__ j

TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUMe XLVII PART 2
Articles
H. Carroll Parish
S.H. Dehlavi
NOVEMBeR 1959
Page
'l'he Myth of Yamada Nagmnasa
a-nd its E.tfect on 'l'lw·i-Japanesc RelationB 159
Tradition and Change 1>n Indo-Prtlc?:stan1:
Olassica.l J.lfusic
1Ci7
J:.iterature
M .R. Seni P1·amoj
A Poet1:c 'l'ntnsla.t?:on fr·om the S·irtntesr~
A Lokaniti Verse
17!1
SVotes
Prince Dhani Nivat
James N. Mosel
H. Oarroll Parish
Nang 'l'alung 181
The Dhannniarn Ra.}r-ttr·akul Nm: Kr·ttng 8a.yrtm
( Protocol cf the Royal Fcnni !Y) by Rama T1 18~2
The Establishment of the Amm"ican S1'am 1'::J'oC'iety 184
Cf3ook CJ1eviews
B.P. Groslier
The South-East As·ian .Rm.(,nd Table,
A Symposium on 'Traditional Ottlt•ures a.nd
Technological Pr"ogr·ess in Sonth-East As1:a.
( J. Cairncross) 189
Angkor et le Oarnbodge au XVI Siecle d'apres
les sour·ces Podttgaises et Espagnoles
( J. Cairncross) 193
A.V. Rajeswara Rao Modern Indian Poetry ( Saad M. Alhashmi) 196
F.B. Sayre Glad Adventure (Prince Dhani) 199
A. Ghosh
W.F. Vella
G.M. Kahh1
Jour·nal of the Burma Resea,r·ch Society
vol. XLI, pts. I &.. II (Prince Dhani)
Indian Ar·cheology (Prince Dhani)
The Impact of the West on Government in
Thailand (Prince Dhani)
Governments and Politics of Southeast Asia
(Prince Dhani)
200
202
204:

Cflecent c3iamese CfJublications
Prtge
.?45. Nar·abh£pal, Nai: Versts rtnd the sebha of h·rtya K.ov and
P1·ava Pan 207
.?46. Ohitra]JO?JS, P·1·inces::; Duavcit : Monastic .Fans 211
247. R.i'tctvsun·ar·n, 0,: .Feats of Her·m:sm of Oaopraya Bod1:ndmde.ia 212
248. 8vasti, 111.0. S~tbhasvasti: Ar1:yavithi 212
!240. Nai Krtew: Record of tht! to1w of the south by H.R.H. the 01'01/'n
Pr£nce 1:n H.8. 128 ( 1910)
2.50. Devu!oongs, H.R.H. Somde'/: K1•oma{!?'aya : 1'lw Fa.mily of
8ttca?·italcul
.951. Birasr·i, Prof. 8. : AtJpreciation of o·ur· Mur·als
216
216
.?.5:J. Jom·nal 'l'haaanrl-Oentr·e, P.E.N. International, "Bhasa le Nar.;sue" 217
c;JJublications of Interest in other cflournals 219
Accessions to the l:.ibrary 225

THE MY'TH OF YAMADA NAGAMASA
AND ITS EFFE-:CT ON THA!·.JAPANESE RELATIONSl
by
Dr. 11. Ce1rro/I Porish
Fu11k and. Wagualls' Coli! JWdwnsiuu Standa1'1l D-iclionai'Y
clescribcs a .tnyt.h as "a Jictitions llttl'l'tltive ful' n time rccoivecl as
historical; rm unproved tracli tiou." In tll.e fielLl of political sciel!ce
a 1uyth is often cnnsitlerecl as a belief, which l!tay or may not he
l;msed on truth, that Hilccts political devell•lJlllCntll. In our cnrptil'Y
here the tertll "myth" will he treated in its pu1itical co11text.
Yaulilrla Nagn.1ua8a :is l'Olilltcd to have lwcn a :Japanese
aitecl Siam during the seventeenth
century kept ext.rnsivo clim·ics, made written reports to
thcil· snpedors, and pnbli:Jhcd books eontniniug their vit"ws
and accounts.
------- -----·----------
1. Based upon a paper delivered at the Fourth Inter.national
Conference of Orientalists in Tokyo on JVIay 22, 1959.

160 Dr. H. Carroll Parish
It is agreed that J apanesc ad von tn rers mu1 traders came to
Siam clnring the sixteenth nncl seventeenth centuries and that, in
the early part of tho latter century, the Japanese in the country
may have num berecl more than one thousand. 'l'rado with foreign
countries was encouraged during the early years of the Tolmgaza
Shogunate, and records foe the years 1604 through 1616 show that
during that time more than forty-four charters were issued to
Jnpunese ships engaged in trade with Siam. In this early period,
Siamese werchant ships were promised the freeJom of Japanese
ports and at least six official Siamese missions were sent to Japan
dnring the period between 1G16 and 1G56.
It was tho custom of Siamese kings to employ foreign
troops in their armies and as royal bodyguards. In the wars
between the Sittmese and Burmese in the sixteenth century it is
recorded that both sides employed Portuguese mercenaries. Dutch
and Japanese records agree that a Japanese Gnard was maintained
by sevel'al Siamese mo11a1·chs. Sir Ernest Mason Satow in his
"Notes on the Intercourse between Japan and Siam in the
Seventeenth Century," 'l.'ransactions of the Asiatic SoC'iety of Japan,
xnr, pt. 2 (1885), mentions on page 187 that up to 1884 the
Siamese Royal Gna.rd included a section known as Asa J'ipun 1
headed by an official bearing the title of Plwaya Senapldmulc.
Siamese officials were referred to by the titles they held
at that time. Royal titles were composed of two main parts which
successively indicated the person's rank and then. described his
task or accomplishments.
Ranks in the seventeenth century
included that of Miin, and progressed through Khnn, Luang, and
Phra to Phraya. The descriptive part of the title was quite often
used only in an abbreviated form because of its length. 'l'hus
Senaphimulc was the short fortn for· Senaphinm1c-?·aa:a-montr?:,
which was composetl of the Thai words sena meaning "troops,"
phimz~k meaning "chief," ~Ytxa. meaning "guard," and montri
meaning "honor." A Luang Senaphimu]{ is mentioned in the
reign of King Naresi.Hm (1589-1594) and an official bearing the

, ... ·""' I
THE MYTH OF YAMADA NAGAMASA 161
same descriptive title is mentioned frequently in histories of
the reigns of his imrnelliftte. successors.
Because a1l history is snl:1ject to exaggeration, bias, and
distortion, it is necessary to compare the accounts written by
authors of clifferent bacl

162 Dr. 1-I. Carroll Parish
In 19H4, tl{e doctoral u isserta tion of Professor Kii chi Gunji,
a former .1 apanese Con sn1-General in Banglcol,, was pn b 1ish eel hy
the ,Japanese Foreign Office. Entitled Jush-icki Se~:lri m: okeru,
N'issen K.ankei, it contained more than 150 pages devotcd to the
story of Yamada, based on Dr. Gunji's examination of the worl{S
of vnn Vliet anll Wood. But, whereas Wood gave Yamar.1a crel1it
for tho conquest of Petohabnri h1 HilO, Dr. Gnnji showed th nt the
leader of that exploit was in reality Shiroi Kyny{,mon (Dr. Iw:w
calls him "Kii Kyuernon"), who was given the rrhai tHle of J,uang
Bon-Patl1·'att (or Ol-uano Son Sattoron). Subsequent wol'l{s hy Professor
i'vfm·almmi, such as Roklcon 0 YAMADA Nagamasa (1942),
:tncl by other authors were based, at least in plut, 01l J)r. Gullji's
ma{f11'U1n Op?,lS.
Beginning in 19BO, Dr. Seiichi Iwao cPnductot1 extem:ivo
research in the Dutch Royal Archives at 'l'ho Hague, and he
d i scove retl the original Flemish version of vnn Vliet's accounts.
He also copied and translated recorus of tho East India Company
and compared with one another the several wor],s and tl~nuslutions
of van Vliet. 'rlul result of these studic•s, which tonk place
over a number of ye~ws, was several articles and the most defini·
tive work to llate concerning the life of Yamada in Siam, the two
volume H'istm·iaf'l Yedtael der SieckttJ cnde ... dom· Je1'emias 1•an
Vliet, .1040 (1958).
The clistingnishccl schohr-statefJman, H.R.H. Prince Dam·
1•ong Rajanubhah, began the reconstruction of his conn try's history
by instituting a thorough search for existing records in Sinrn,
and, during his trips abroad, by collecting histories that had been
compi1ed by foreigners. In 190"1, he arranw·cl for the publication
of W.H. Mundie's English t1·anslation of the 1

TilE MYTH OF YAMADA NAGAMASA 163
'l'cxtbook histories of Siam used in the schools iu that
period included a brief account of the seventeenth century ,Japanese
colony and referred to Okya Scnaphimnk's exploits. In 1913, King
Vajiravndh (Rama VI) requested his retiring chief legal advisor,
D1•. 'l'okichi 1\iasao, (Phraya lVIahiclon), to collect and sencl him
such materials concerning Siamese-.Tapanese relations as con1c11Je
ronnel in .Japan. On his l'eturn horne, Masao secnreu the aid of
Professor Sanji Mikarni at 'fo1{yo University ancl Professor Gin;~,o
Uchida at Kyoto Univm·sity. Also assisting in this task was a
graclnnte student of Professor Mikami, now Dr. Koya Nalmmura,
who, at !:irst, collecte(1rnaterials in the Tt1kyo area ancl, later,
assisted with proof1·cading and ccnnpilati011.
lJrcfaced by an Eng1ish snmnuny written by Dr. Masao,
the 8·iam-Japan Inten·hanue Ilisto?'1·cal Jlrfa te?'ial eontah1ed a section
entitled "Tho Rise and Fall of Yarnacln." Althougl1 five copies
were prepared, only onu was nu:tc1e complete. This copy was presented
to the King in 1914. According to Dr. Iwao (op. cit., p.v.) several
copies of these documents were also sent to the Vajhanana National
Library. Thdr interest excited by this project, J?rofessor
Uchida pnblishecl a book, Nihon to 1'aJ!colcn torw Kanlcei (1931),
and Dr. Nalmmn1·n produced an article, ''Yumacla Nagamasa,
.Tapanese Warrior in Old Siam," which was later published in
Onllw·al Nipvon, VII (1iecember, 1939).
In 19i\1}, Phya Srishtilwr Banchong, who devoted many
years to the promotion of better understantling between the
Siamese and Japanese peoples, published a booklet in Thai and
English based on Satow's paper which was called A B?·ief History
of Okya SenaphimuJch (Ohao Phya Nalcorn) (Yarnaclct Nagarnasa)
in the time uj Aywlhya in the ?'e•ign of K·ing Pr•ctBat't Tung. A former
Ambassador to Japan, lJt1ang Vichitr Vadal

164. Dr. H. Carroll Parish
status in .Japan, the date and rnarmer of his coming to Sin.m, his
life in Siam, and the ma.nner and date of his death remain to be
verified.
One example of the factual disagreement among scholars
about Yamada concerns the marmer of his death. On the one
hand, as Dr. Nakamur~t pointtl out, on page 84 of his article mentioned
n.bove, that according to Siamese history Yamada died ·a
natural death. Both H.S.H. Pl'inces~ .Poon Pismai Dis1ml and
Khun Dhanit Yupho, Director-General of the Fine Arts Department,
substantiate this conclusion in recently published articles.
On the other hand, three Japanese scholars argue that Yamada
was poisoned, althongh '\.hey differ ns to t.he exac:t method employed.
Professor 1\'Ilki on page 21 of his book in Eng1ish states
that Yamada's death was dne to a ''poisonec1 plaBter" wl1ich was
placed on a ·wound in his leg. Dr. Gnnji, on page ilC4 of an article
entitled "Yamal1a Nttgamnsn, .Japanese Oondottiere in Thailand,''
Oontcmp01'a?'Y Jctpan, X (1\Iarch, 1941), states that Yamada died
of poison placed in his food. However, on page xxvii of the
later study by Dr. hvao it is mentioned that an attem1ant
"applied poison as tl10ugh it were medicine."
'!'here is also a question concernh1g the vrracity of the
source of infOl'mtttion which has been consiclerecl the most reliahle,
that of the merchant, .Jeremias van Vliet. If 1630 is accepted as
the year of Yamada's death, it must be noted that van Vliet did
not set foot on Siamese soil prior to 16g3, 'l'hen, as Tlr. Gnn.ii nnd
other writers point out, the literature of the time clearly testifies
to the rivalty between the .Japauese and Dutch in Siam and contains
many slanderous rPmarks by Dutch merchants ahout the
.Japanese. Is it possible that van Vliet's accounts concerning
Yamada were biased?
Most Westerners in rendering accounts
of their visits and residence in Asian countries were prone to
exaggerate and distort the facts. Was it possible for van Vliet
to have beeu W11 e:1'ception ?

'l'll" M1'l'll OF YAMA!JA NA

166 D1·. H. Carroll Paril.lh
In spite of these opillions, the favorable Yamada story
issued under the guidance of Lnaug Vichitr Vacla]mrn and
1\:lr. Yanagisawa Ken remains an d[ective one. Many young
'l'hai have developed a sympathetic attitulle toward this version
of the myth. And in Japan the int.erest in Yamada remains
strong. A motion picture abont him, althongh of doubtful historical
anthentic:ity, has recently beeu proclueed. It was made by
Daiei Prodnetions in cooperation with ~iam's veteran producer,
H.R.H. Prince Bhannbhaucl Yugala, aud it was released in May
1959. It is hoped that this continuing ,Japanese interest in Yam.acht
wi.ll be channelled into ruoro extensive scholarly investigations
and thnt Yamada may yet emerge more clearly as a political
symbol whoso lustre will not clepend upon tho vicissitudes of
political relations.

TRADITION AND CHANGE: IN INDO-PAKISTANI
CLASSICAL MUSIC 1
hy
Shahid Ahmad Dchlavi
There is a continuity in hnrnan 1ife which trmlScends
individual existence. Men die, but man lives and gl·ows.
Inc1iviclnal
humau endeavour is not an isolated phenomenon. In art
or science, every effort men malw is a brick in the edifice.
Newton remarked that if he reached high i11to the realms of
science, it was because he stood on the shoulders of giants, his
predecessors.
In one sense, the importance of tradit-ion in art is greater
tlHm it i::; in science, and in another sense it is less. It is less in
that the arts (lo llOt 11ocessarily p1•ogress with the passage of tirue,
in that every arti::lt. is not able to make the achievemC'uts of
previous artists his own merely by studying their work He
must cover all of that ground by himself. A scientist who reads
and who understands the work done by his predeces!:lors acquires
the resulti:l of their effort. Every new scientific pf[ort will almost
necessarily be an advance because results can be objectively
chec1wcl ann errors Mn be detected and eliminated. Thus the
scientist need not solve those problems again which were solved
by older scientists. Tho composer or musician, howove1', must
cover all the areas covered by his predecessors, and solve all th"e
problems of harmony ancl melody and counter-point by himself,
using the previous works only as guides. Past works do not give
the help to an artist that they give to a scientist.
1. Adapted from a lecture delivered at the March 12, 1959, meeting
of the Siam Society.

168 Shahid Ahmad Dehlavi
In another sense, the importance of the work of predecessors
is far greater in art than in science. A scientist can reject
u. whole line of thought followed by older scientists for hundreds
of years if he thinl's he has found a better answer to the same
problem. This has lu.tJ1ponerl again and again in scionee. Oo110rnicus
rejected the cosmological system of Ptolemy; Einstein replaced
Newton's theo1•y of gravity by the space-time curvature propoundec1
in his theory of relati vit.y. Hut iu art, no such complete
break is possible. 'l'he literature of Euro)Je is one continuous
stream .. So is tho literature of Asia, or perhaps J should say tho
literatures of Asia. 'l'here have been changes in the flow of these
streams, but no complete break. One may be able to reject traditional
theol'ies it1 science as soon as he develops a better theory,
but in art if one rejects the paHt tmclitions, he has made his
work almost hopelessly difficult. Art achieves its results by
working upon the emotions, and emotions of every l

TRADl'JJON AND CHANGE IN INDO-PAKISTANI CLASSICAL MUSIC 169
.
creation is lost in the millionth copy of it. Moreover, the onward
progression of man's spirit demands new expression for each
period and placr. \Nhile no one will rleuy that gre~Lt art is nniveJ•sal,
and that what is goocl is good for all time, the spirit of
one age .finds fu1ler rxpression in certain modes than it does
in others. Great artists renew old forms by a f1·esh use of the
elements of art. Old words become lifeless, old colour schemes
become dn 11, old me loclies seem monotonous, nn li:'SS the words and
colour and notes are used in new ways :mel unless they are
given new meaning and significance.
Indo-Pltldstani music, as a living body of art, exemplifies
Loth these principles throughout the course of its history. It has
its roots in the Hinc1n rnusie which existeu in a rnclimentary form
of the liturgy antl the devotional hymn. 'l'his fonn was later
refined and systematised in the courts of the gi·eat Muslim kiiJgs
of Delhi, before and during the Mughalrule, into the grand mode
of Dhurpad singing. With increasing refinement, ancl fastidiousness
of taste nncler the later lVInghals, the Khayal style of singing
was developed, 'rhe gay 1ifc of the Onclh court made possible the
evolution of the Thuml'i and Dadrn styles of singing. During
the modern age of mass entertn.inment and westernization :film
rnnsic and orchestral mnsic were developed in order to satisfy
now needs.
Not much can be definitely said about the music oE ancient
India. Jt pl'obably consisted mostly of simple hymns and devotional
songs which nsecl only three and, later, five notes. 'l'hese
songs were known as Knbt, Doha, Chhancl, Bhorn and Pad.
Gradually some of these compositions began to be synthesized,.
and the combination of Dhoru ancl Pnd gave rise to the
elaborate and complex Dhnrpacl. It is a vigol'ious and simple type
of singing for men only, in which heroic ta1es of gods and demigods
are recited. What its eal'ly and primitive form was, one can
only guess at, but the Dhnrpad as we know it, in the form which
it took i.n the;: tim~ of Altbar, when great nn1sici.ans lilre Tan San

170 Shahid Ahmad Dehlavi
and. Bilas Khan developed it, has four parts-Astlwi, Antara,
Sancha.i, and Abhog. It is snug in a rhythm called Chan-tal and
Sol-Pakhta, and in some other obsolete rythms. Hori and Sadra
also are forms of Jhnrpad sung in r>Jumun m· nn

TRADITION AND CHANGE IN INDO·PAKISTANI CLASSICAL MUSIC 171
The wo1·l{ of Amir Khnsrn and other great invPntors and
composers wn.s rnado pos~iblo by the deep appreciation and
generous patronage of the Muslim rn1crs of India. Even a ruthless
conqueror lil'c AlaudJiu Khilgi, when he captured the kingdom
of Tlcogil'i, dem:m(tcd as t.rilmte hom tho local Raja his gre,atest
eonrt mnsidan, Gopal Naik, who \Vall later brought to the conrt
of 11elhi aud rveeived with gi·eat honour. 'l'he great ruler of the
kingdom of Jnnnpnr in Northern India, Sultan Husain Sharqi,
greatly encmnttged the cleYolopment of music and, through his
composit.ions, he contl'ibntecl grratly to the development of the
Dhmpal1 style of singing. 'l'he comt pniiJtE'l'S of the Mnghals
made portraits of some of the great musieia11S of the time. A
few of these paintings arr: extnllt today. The g1•eat respect and
honom· in which the art of mnsic waH held by the Mnslim rulers
is evident in many l'l'Corc1s.
'ransen was n renowned composer and mnsicirm of tho
conrt of Akbar, anc1 there were other remarkaule men such as
Bilas .Khan, lh1.rang Khan and Lttl Khan. These were not idle
imitators but men who enrich ell and evolved and raised our music
to greater heights. It would be impossible· to give an adequate
idea of their iunovations and inventions in a bl'ief space here, but
somet;hing mnl:lt be said abont the momentous role played by
'l'ansen. He was a si11ger in the Dhnrpacl style, but his contrilmtion
consists in his thorough research in to all the Range and
Raagnis of Indian music from which he selected some of the
best and then developed and perfected them to a definitive form.
Numerons raags and raagnis which are sung today are sung in
the form which was given to them by 'l'ansen. We have Mian ki
'l'odi, Mian ka Malahar, and Mian lra Sarang, which are raags
composed by Minn 'ranson. Thii:l composer also explored enti1•ely
new possibilities and invr:ntecl snch novelrao.gs as Dnrbal'i, which
is one of the most majestic and im.twessive of them all.
In the time of the later Mughals, in the 18th century,
there arose two great composers and musieians called Adarang
f111e1 S~tdarau~ who gracetl the court of Mohamed Shah. They \tl'O

172 Shahid Ahmad Dehlavl
responsible for p(;pnlal'ising the style of singing which is known
as the Khayal. 'l'he invention of t.his style is attributed to Sultan
Husain Shnrqi of Jounpnr. 'l'his invention did nut receive the
stamp of popular approval until it was p1·ese11ted by such masterly
exponents as Adarang and Sadarang. From their time onwards
it becnme so popula1· t.hat it completely replaced the Dlnnpad
style of singing. Hnndrecls and thousands of musicians have nsNl
this form and contributed to its development. Among them are
Snraj Khan and Chand Khan, Tam·as Khan and Fayyas Khan of
the recent past. The Khayal is a more elegant nncl refined form
of singing than the Dlnnpad. It is richly ornamented ·with beautiful
tans, that is, iuterestilJg variation on tlle basic pattern of
the notes of that raag. The last of the great l\fnghals, Bahadnr
Shah Zafar, has himself left, a compositi(ln in the Khyal style
unclcr the name of "Shanq Rn~tg." 'l'lle peculiarity of his com~
position is that he gh'es two nntaras to n single nsthaL 'l'he
Khayal that is sung today is different from the Khayal that was
snng by Adarallg and Sadn.rang because continuing modifications
and refinements have been made in this form of singing. At
first the Khayul had the same basic form as the Dhurpad und was
composed of tho same four parts, Asthai, Antara, Sanchai an{l
Abhog. Later on, the last two were rlt·opped, and now only the
Asthai mHl Antara remain. Similarly, at first the Khayal was
sung in very many many tans and rythms, bnt now only about
ten or twelve rythms are nsecl. 'l'he use of rlifl'erent tans in
Khayal also has changed from age to age.
With the clecliue and fall of tho Mnghal Empire., the
centres of C11ltm·e moved away from Delhi to Luclmow, Hyderab3cl
ancl other places. Luclmow in particular became a great centre
of art and literature. 'l'he Itings of Onclh were pat1'ons and prac.
titioners of music. Wajid Ali Shah composed under the name of
Akhtar Dra. In the Court o:E Oudh there prevailed a mode of
gaiet.y and carefree ienjoyment which demanded a different type
ofmnsio to. express its spil•it. In this .atmosphere of elegance and
frivolity the rrhumri for.nl took its birth. It was an offshoot o:f

THAIJl'l'ION AND C:llt\NGE IN lN!lO-PAKISTt\NI CLASSJt:t\L MUSIC 173
the Khayal, bnt. the style of singing is quite diff'e1·ent. It. is meallt
to be sung by women because it gives expression to ideas of love
and romance and is accompanied hy gestures and postures which
hot·\ler on the lascivious. But after women singers 'von great
popularity for the Thuml'i, men hogan to copy them. They tried
to substitute the physical gestures by clever turns ll,lld twists of
tho voice. 'rhe rythms in 'l'hnmri are lively and gay, as Punjabi
aml cha chm·. The verses sung in Tlnunri are also full of sellsuous
charu1s.
Dacll•a is another :Eurm which was patruniJ~ed at the Cunrt
of Oudh. It is rather like rrlmmri, bnt the words are in the Poorbi
dialect and the song has a rustic backgronud. Both Thumri and
Dadra are semi-classical compositions.
Another innovation of the clays of the Oudh ki11gtlom wns
'l'uppa. Tappa is a song sung by the camel-drivers of the Puuj

17

TRADITION AND CHANGE IN INDO-PAKISTANI CLASSICAL MUSIC 175
.
in this music was the harmonium because more subtle instruments
like the Sitar or the Sarangi had not the volume to reach the ears
of the large audiences gathe1;ed attracted by these plays, A great
deal of use was made of dance tunes; choruses, and orchestration
of musical instruments, all for the pm•pose of making the show
more audible to the gathering. Our fine classicai music is a ldnd
of chamber music becatlse it was created for small audiences, but
the demands of the public theatre gave rise to wide innovation, and
our musicians rose to the occasion and developed sorrte extremely
interesting new forms and styles of singing and playing.
New research into the scientific basiB of our music was
accompanied by great organisational activity. Schools and colleges
of music were established.
At the beginning of the twentieth
century radio and films made their appearance, tmd both provided
new avenues for the development of nnH.oic.
Becanse of the very
wide appeal of the films it was natural for tht>m to use folk
music. The radio, on the other hand, was a medinm t.hat was
able to cater to every taste, the popular, the refined, and the
fastidious.
l!'ilm music has ueen deplored and critieised as a vulgarization
of our musical tradition. 'fhis may well be true, but it
does provide an opportunity for our musicians to break new
ground and to satisfy new demands. 'fhere is no cloullt that among
the hundreds of songs written and composed for the films the
major portion are mere sentimental and romantic effusions that
do not contain much art..
But it cannot be denied that they have
occasionally been able to achieve a greater degree of emotional
expressiveness than can be found in our more traditional and
formal music. 'l'his ability to express feelings and moods is a
matter of the highest impol'tance in nny al't, especially in music.
If our film music has helped to point the wa.y here it has made n
definite contribution.

176 Shahid Ahmad Dehlavi
Radio music has also been the subject of controversy.
Some people e1·iticise the broadcasting of film songs and others the
broadcasting of classical music. Radio, however, has tried to
satisfy both tastes. It is not always easy to persunde the best
singers to sing on the microphone. Onr musicians are used to
singing directly to their audiences and this personal contact between
the artist and his audience is of great bnpot·tance to them.
However, they have graclnally ndjnsted themselves to the eonditiona
of radio singing, and nnw one ean l1ear even
•
our beat rnast.ers
on the radio. By bringing the songs of our best singers to the
common man the radio has rendered great serviee to musie. If we
look for definite addition or enrichment of our music through the
medium of the rndio we observe a greater nse of folk songs which
are considerably refined and modified. That the unknown or
little-lmown songs wl1ieh once echoed only in the forestl:l of East
Bengal have reached the city dwellers of Lahore and Karachi is
a great achievement. When these songs are greatly refined and
made to conform to a set scale of notef:! and a correct rhythm,
they undergo a develupment which may wel1 lead to the enrichment
of our classical nnu:iC'. 'fhe radio mnsiciam; have also been
p1·actici11g such innovations as setting Urdu songs to Bengali tu11es
ancl Bengali songs to Sindhi tunes, so that musical ideas and
traditions are made to mingle, to circulate, nnd thereby e11rich
the musical repertoire of the different regions of the eoun try.
Some purist critics may object to the great emphasis that
is being given to folk music on the radio, but it must be remem.
bered that foll' music is the soil and source of all national music.
It is from folk music that the flowers of t•aags and ragnis blossmn.
This soil must be enriched if the garcleu of our classical music
is to flourish. Changes in raags and ragnis cannot be made on the
basis of artificial th eol'ies.
'rhe soil of our music. must be
watered by circulating the musical riches of onr folk songs. 'l'heil•
effect on our classical music would then follow a natural process.
Change and evolution of arts ca~mot be fot•ged. '.rhe natural must be
spontaneous.

.
TRADITION AND CHANGE IN INDO·PAKIS1'ANI CLASSICAL MUSIC 177
There is every reason to hope that the inherent 'Vitality of
Indo-Pakistani music will enable it to assimilate new influences
and continue to evolve and progress as it has done in the past.
'l'he continuity of the stream must not be broken and the fresh
waters of the past should continue to flow into the gardens of the
present. If this is done tradition and change will combine to bring
Indo-Pakistani music to its finest flower.

...
·.
A POETIC TRANSlATION FROM THE SIAMESE
A Lokaniti Verse
by
3Y{. qJ_. 0eni C]Jramoj
During the Ayuthya period of Siamese history a body of
proverbs and ancient sayings from sacred books, such as the
Oambbira Lokaniti, the Lokanaya, the Jataka and the Dharmapada,
were rendered into verse by an unknown author or authors.
This collection of verses became popularly known as the Lokaniti
Poem ( 1m'l~ hflu~ ). During the course of their being handed
down from one generation to another the verses accumulated a
large number of variations, mistakes and misspellings. When
King Rama III, in the year B.E. 2374, had various restoration
works undertaken at Wat Phra Jetupon ( Wat Bho ), he commanded
his brother, Prince Dejadisorn, to gather together all of the old
verses and correct them. The Prince performed this task and
the corrected verses were inscribed on stone tablets which were
set in the columns of Wat Phra Jetupon.
One of these verses in which poetic beauty is enhanced
by an intricate rhyme scheme has been translated here into
English verse. In this translation an attempt has been made to
indicate the rhyme scheme (by the use of word repetition only)
without making too great a sacrifice of the poetic quality of the
original.
0
fl1l1'W~
" .[. ~
U1fiU'Vl l1tJ-3m
Fathoms deep though the seas
Measurable are the seas
Scaled can mountains be
Immeasurable is the depth,
may be,
in depth.
in height.
this heart of mau.

...

\
NOTES
NANG TALUNG
In the .Bulletin de la S' ociete des Et•ttdes ·indochinoises, Tome
XXXIII, no 3, (1958) M. Henri Marchal contributed a note on
the shadow-play at Siemreap, which, even though adding nothing
new to what has lJeen known up to now, is interesting. He
says at the outset that what he describes is not to be confounded
with the Nctng Sbelc with its larger :figm·es. The subject of his
note is the Cambodian Nctng Kaloung, a corresponding type of
which, he l'ightly points out, is the Nan(! Talun(l in this country.
The Nang '1'alung here is of conr8e smaller in size than
the Nang Yai, which userl to be ]mown here as 'l'he Na11g, the
word "yai" being adder1 to signify its size to distinguish one
from the ot.her. As its name implies, the Nang 'Talung is the
Pn.ttalung type of a shadow-play; and fl,f!10ng illiterate people it
ha8 often been called Nan{! Kn.ltvn[!. the letter K being probably
}L mere ~t~similation from the guttural nasal carried over
from the fin n.1 of the preceding word Nan g. 'l'he N aiJ1.(! 'Tctlung
is thus a mere provincial, adoptem Nanq Sbelc does; while the 'Talung type iu
this country is played to a wide scope of subjects, though, as M.
Marchal says, the Cambodian Nan{] Kaloung is limitecl to the
story of Rarna. In all probability, therefore, the Cambodian type,
borrowing its name from the Nang 'Talung here, should hn.ve
heen clerived from it. 1YI. Marehal is silent on this point.
The sole object of this note is merely to clraw attention
to the fact that, whi.le the greater number of cultural features
here have been drawn from Cambodia, the more recent types
travel vice ver·sa.. The l'!Jre is another example.
CD.

i82
James N. Mosei
THE DHARMNIAM RAJATRAKUL. NAI KRUNG SAYAM
(PROTOCOL OF THE ROYAL FAMILY) BY RAMA V 1
Last year there was published a treatise by King Ohulalongkorn
on the Siamet~e system of royal ranks and titles. Tbis
work was reviewed in the November 195R issue of this Journal.
The King's original manuscript is dated 1878 but it remained
undiscovered until 1932 when it was found among the papers
transferred from the office of the King's Private Secretary. The
manuscript was deposited in the National Library and was published
for the first time last year on the occasion of the cremation
of the remains of the late Princess Athorn.
In the course of research on the history and structure of
royal titles, the present w1•iter has uncovered some interesting
facts which indicate that t.he contents of the King's manuscript
must hn.ve been avail able to two European scholars shortly after
its composition.
Five years after the King had prepared his
tt·eatise, there appeared a papel' by E. Gilbert,
''La Famille
Roynle de Siam," in the Bnlletin de la 8oc'i'et'e Academique Indo­
Oh£no-ise (2e Serie, t. iii, Oct. 1883).
An examination of the
phraseology and arrangement of topics in this paper reveals
quite clearly that. large portions are a translation of King
Ohnlalougkorn's treatise, while other portions are merely a condensation.
In many places whole sen tenees are direct translations.
'fhe selection of exawples (whore a large number of possible
examples exist) and the historical con:ioctnres are often identical.
1'hen again, inl893, G.E. Gerini wrote Ohoulakctntctmartgala,
or The 1'onsure Oeremony as Pe?·jormed in Siam. (This worl' waH
not published unti11895, but it is stated in the author's introduction
that the manuscript was ren.dy for publication in 189il.)
In the appendix of this book (pp. 170-174) there is au outline of
1. The study leading to this note was made while the writer was
in Siam in 1958-1959, under a grant from the Ford Foundation.

~o!' -
"'

fff
184 . \: H. Cauo11 Pat"h
THE ESTAaLISHMENT OF THE AMERICAN SIAM SOCIEiY
After the end of World War II, Thai visitors and students
began comillg to the Unit£'d States in large nnlllbers. Academic
institutions throughout the United States tool' an increasing interest
in Southeast Asia, and p~trticnlarly in Siam, which is the
m•ossroacls of the :trert. Comparative studies of this region were
pioneered by Cornell University, and other prominent institutions
followed its le:tcl. Schohtrs worldng in the field of Southeast
Asian studies became increasingly aware of the need to maintain
contact with each other and to tap the valuable sources of information
which could be pr·ovided by visiting Tlu~i government
officials, scholars, and students.
Because the examples set by the excellent programs of
snell. binational, enlt.ural organizations ns the Japan-America
Societies and the China Society of America, tl. group of Amel'icUilS
intereRted in Siam suggested that a similar organization be
estnb"Jished. A proposal to this effect was subsequently forwarded
to the Siam Society. After dillcnssing the suggestion with the
Oonncil of the Society, its Pt·esiclent answered on Jnly 18, 1955,
expressing approval of the plan and offering recornmendat.ions
aucl assistance in estttblishing the group. 'l'lw first. meeting, held
on April 24, l95G, was

THE ESTAl:lLISHMEN'f OF THE AMERICAN SIAM. ~ !)CIETY 185
Thailand and its neighboring countries, the as~istance and entertainment
of Thai visitors and students resident in or travelling
through the United States and the observance of Thai national
holidays. Th~ Society is unclertaking the establishment of a
lib1·ary and a research center containing books, periodicals, and
newpapers, and providing a central catalogne and bibliographical
reference service for Thai materials to assist both American and
Thai researche1·s. '!'he publication of such items as will contribute
to its program is also planed.
Membership consists of five classes: life, honorary, regular,
associate, and corporate. The members of the firBt two classes are
not reqtlired to pay dnes; annual dues were set at $5 for regular
members, ($1 for associate members (Thai students), and $100 for
corporate members. Thai students were to be encouraged to join
the Society but it was ag1•eed that the o1•.ganizntion would in no
way interfc:n·e with the program of the Thai Alliance, or with that
of any local association of Thai students. In order to assure the
maximum coopera.tion with Thai student groups, it was provided
that an ex officiu membership in the Council would be held open
for the presiclent of the Thai Alliance in America. A designated
representative of that organization is invited to attend meetings
of the Conncil when its president is unable to attend.
In order to emphasize the national character of the Society,
the officers and members of the Council we1·e elected on a regional
basis. Dr. Mason, professor of government at Geogetown University,
represents the Washington, D.C., area and the South; Dr.
Vella, Associate Director of the Thailand Project [tt Cornell, represents
New York and the New England area.
During 1956, a deleg

;~
186 t 1
H. Carroll Parish
Annual m'eetings are held in conjunction with the ammal
celebration of the King's birthday. 'rhis is considered particularly
appropriate in that His Majesty is the only reigning Oriental
monarch who was born in the United States. The first such celebration
was a happy occasion. A picture of the King, loaned by
the Royal Thai Embassy, and a picture of Prince Kanchit graced
the panel behind the speaker's table. The hall and the tables
were decorated with the Thai national colors. Thai food was
prepared by 'l'hai students nnder the direction of the chef, Mt·.
Pandit .Janelmrnkit. Messages of congratulations and greetings
weN\ received anclread from H.H. Prince Dlutni Nivat, Kromamun
Biclyalnbh, Ambassador Pote Sarasiu, ancl the president of the
'l'ha.i Alliance. Dr. Davi Yanasugondha represented the Thai
community in replying to the toast to the King. Thai students
sang Thai songs, performed 'l'hai classical dances, and gave an
exhibition of the "Ramwong." A telegram, received from His
Majesty's Private Secretary, read as follows:
"AM COMMANDED TO CONVEY TO YOU AND
AMERICAN SIAM SOCIETY HIS MAJESTY'S SINCERE
THANKS FOR CONGRATULATIONS OFFERED ON HIS
BIRTHDAY. HIS MAJESTY WARMLY APPRECIATES
THE GOOD WISHES AND SENTIMENTS EXPRESSED."
Mr. Robin Penman, who was Honorary Secretary of the
Siam Society, was the guest of honor at the meeting of February
7, 1957. He presented the Society with a picture of His Majesty
the King, the gift of Lieutenant General Phya Salvidhan Nides,
and a Thai national flag as his personal gift. He delivered an
interesting lecture on modern Siam and showed colored slides
loaned by H.H. Prince Dhani. Three Thai students were presented
with annual memberships in recognition of their valuable assistance
on the occasion of the King's birthday celebration.
On June 1, the Society enjoyed an afternoon reception at
which Mr. Kamol Kedusiri of the Thai Department of Fine Arts
who was travelling under a U.S. State Department Specialist
grant, played a number of Thai classical musical instruments and
explained Thai music to th.e groqp, Miss Supannlca sang an

THE ES'l'AB!.ISHMEN'l' OF THE AMEIUCAN SIAM I :JCIETY 187
accompaniment for some of this music and rendered several other
'rhai and American selections.
On August 26, I was privileged to address the annual convention
of the Thai Alliance held at the University of Wisconsin
at Madison. In the talk I outlined the Society's objectives and
the means hy which it was planned to achieve them. The
opportunities open to 'fhai students compared with students
from other countries studying in the United States I also antlined.
Methods of insuring the clol:lest cooperation between the
two organizations were discussed during two meetings with the
national officers. Later, in New York, I confcrecl with the now
ambassador, H.E. Thanat I010man, and t'ecdved assurances of
his future cooperation. During a visit with our honorary vicepresiclen
t, the Hon. Edwin F. Stan ton, co ope ration with the Asia
Society was discussec1. Ambassador Stauton informed us of the
planned organization of a Siam Committee of that group. At a
later visit with its Executive Director, lYir. Paul Sherbert, we
considered the possibility of finding a place for our repository in
the new Asia House, which will be completed soou.
In October, Dr. Kenneth Wells, Director of Christian
Education and Literature of the Church of Christ in Siam and
an active member of the Siam Society, addressed the Society on
"Bangkok, the Convention City." This excellent address contained
a review of cm·rent programs of the Siam Society in Bangkok.
The American Siam Society was represented at the 6th
annual UNESCO Conference held on November 6-9, 1957, in San
Francisco. The theme of the convention was Asia and the United
States. Onr best contribution toward the goals of the organization
was felt to be in the realm of personal contacts between ·nationals
of the two countries and I pa1·ticipated in the work panel
which dealt with this subject. At the second celebration of His
ji!Iajesty's birthday, H.H. Prince Dhani, was elected on Honorary
Life Member of the Society.
In addition to the usual program,
a Jll.Otiop. pictllre concerning tlle life of King Mongkut was shown.

.
, ....
"·
,.'
.
188 ., H. Carroll Partsh
In 1958, quarterly meetings were scheduled and, during
my absence in Japan, the first vice-president, Major James D.
Deatherage, acted in my p1ace. Dr. Lauriston Sharp joined our
Council and Colonel and Mrs. John W. Davis were active in aiding
our officers to carry out our program.
The third anniversary of the American Siam Society has
passed. Our only regret is that the Society has as yet not pro.
duced a worthy publication. But is has, during this period, enjoyed
an unusual growth which has been due, in large part, to the broad
contacts and untiring efforts of its secretary, Miss J..Jucy Star1ing,
and its honorary vice-president, Mrs. Lucius Bulkley, as well as
tho unswerving support of the Siam Society anrl its president,
H.H. Prince Dhani Nivat, Kl'omarnun Bidyahtbh.
'3C. 6arroll C]Jarish

900K REVIEWS
'fhe South-East Asian Round Table, A 8ym JJOsium on Tr·adit•ional
Cultures and 1'echnological Prog?'e.s.s in South-East Asia. Published
by the South-East Asia Treaty Org

19b
BOOK hEVtEWS
put the point we!•l, if somewhat optimistically: "The genius of 11.
people is preserved less in the traits which they have assumed
in the past than in the creations which they will bring forth in
the future." However, change is a complex and varied process,
The externals of a civilization are easily adoptetl mechanically
but techniques (or technology, us the modern pttrlance has it)
cannot be imported like a pound of butter. They mnst be digested
slowly, assimilated from the botton up, and adapted in the process
to the needs of the society acquiring it. As Professor Northrop
expounded learnedly and n,t length, the technical conquests of the
West rest on a century-old basis of concepts (mathematical,
moral and political) which can hardly be adopted by the East
unchanged, though the fruits of these values may be unreservedly
desired.
The dilemma of the East-to take the new wine and the
bottles or j11st the wine-is l'ellected faithfully, to tal'e one example,
in the question whether to adopt a T~nropean tongne for higher
education, especially in technical subjects. No very clear guidance
emerged from the cliscussion of this point by the Round 'rable,
and Professor Longchambon's hope that tr:tnslating machines
will solve the problem is perhaps u. trifle fal·-'fetched. Most
Asians stressed the difficulties of their nationals in mastering a
-western tongue, tmd the time consumed by these efforts. While
sympathizing with them on thi.s score, one cannot, as a Western
(and therefore biased) observer, help feeling that their reaction
is basecl to some extent on national pride (though none the
less valid for that). 'rhe "national" solution presupposes the
translation of text books antl other material on tt formidable
scale which can as little be afforded by a growing and none too
rich Asian country ns the tronhlP taken by students to learn,
say, English; nnd the latter studies have~ at least the advantage
that tlwy open np to the A~iu.n nation c:oucel'necl the whole
world of info1·matin11, tl~chniqurs :wd contacts which aro in any
case needed for their advancement. 'l'lw solution wherd>y the local
language is used fur the majority of sturlies, and English adopted
as a nniversttl second language, hns worked well for such nations
as the Netherlancli:! and Sweden. Surely, it can hB modified to
provide a lasting solntiou for the linguistic difficulties in the field
of education of the Asian count1·ieB ns well. And, whether we

BOOK REVIEWS
1ike it or not, one has only to attend an import'a11t conference in
this region to be convinced that English is already in practice
adopted as the cultural lingua franca of the delegates.
However, the question of reconciling Eastern culture and
Western technology goes deeper than the mere question of
language.
In fact, serious discussion of almost any problem in Asia
must take as its starting point the fact that the gap between
the standards of living in the developed and the under-developed
countries is widening l'apidly in spite of the present attempt of
most countries of the region to break the century-old economic
stagnation and misery by development programmes which provide
for industrialization and the improvement of their agriculture.
Fo:r, unless some measure of success in this direction is achieved,
there can be little point in talking of expanding education and
creating a new type of art when the society as a whole is stagnating.
The difficulties in the way of this economic advance are
formidable. There is a shortage of capital, of skills, and an
overabundant supply of births to swallow up any increase in per
capita income achieved. Yet this vital struggle for economic
progress was hardly mentioned by the conference. These was 1
on the contary, a speech on the need to return to the land ~hich
was as unrealistic as it was apparently oblivious of the innumerable
down"to-earth measures tal{en to improve agriculture in the
region over the past ten (and more) years, and the careful
studies being made of urbanization. It is surely necessary to
discuss cultural advances against the background of the economic
development of the region.
Secondly, and perhaps even more important, even if the
economic breakthrough is achieved it will entail a radical transformation
not only of thinll:ing (as pointed out by Professor
Northrop) but of the whole social and cultural pattern, and
even in many cases of religion. It is not at all exaggerate to
talk in this context of a 1·evolution. Yet it must be admitted
that planners in most countries are only now beginning to take
accotmt of the social, and even less, the cultural changes which
are an integt•al part of this revolution. Professor Crocker
stressed the key question of how to control the process of
development. But, in the cultural field, it is by no means
i9i

192 l!OOK REV!EWS
certain that the •immense movement of economic change, with
its attendant phenomena, can be more than partially guided,
even with totalita1•ian methods. For it is relatively easy to
destroy an existing culture pattern. It is immensely difficult
to build up a new one. It may be that, as several speakers
asserted, there is no inherent clash between Eastern art or
religion and modern technology. But the real conflict is between
the culture (often popular) of a pre-industrial society and that
of an industrial one. And what is happening all too frequently
is that the former is lost and only the externals of the 1u tter
are acquired. 'rhe classical example of the extinction of an
ancient art is that of the Yemenite Jews whose thousand-year
old music was lost almost overnight when it was brought faceto-face
with modern music in Israel.
Professor Yamamoto was therefore more than justified
in calling for a greater attempt to collect and study factual
information about Asian culture, much of which is in European
museums, and for a comparative study of the process of moderui­
:~,ation in Southeast Asia.
· These critical considerations suggest, not that the Round
Table was unsuccessful, but that, as Tom Harrisson recommended,
a further series of conferences should be held to carry on this
vital debate by discussions of more specific issues. And, if the
reviewer may offer two tentative suggestions for these conferences,
far greater use might be made of the storehouse of
economic and sociological knowledge accumulated by modern
researchers on under-developed countries (including a good deal
by EOAFE in Bangkok), and a less complacent view shonld be
taken of the danger that ten years from now a process of cultural
erosion may have dried up (possibly for ever) vast tracts of
Asia which (whatever their present economic poverty) represent
cultural values which have surely something to contribute to a
world which is beginning to realize that affluence is not enough.
c!f. fJairncross

BOOK REVIEWS 193
Bernard-Philippe Groslier, Anokor et le Oamboaoe at~ XVI Siecle
d'apres les sources po1·tugaises et espagnoles, with the collaboration
of C.R. Boxer, Paris, Presses Universitaires de France, 1959. 194
pages, with numerous maps and seven plates.
'rhe sta1•ting point of this valuable study is a document
recently discovered by Professor Boxer-an account of Angkor
by Diogo do Couto, the official chronicler of the Portuguese lndieH.
Groslier inserts this statement in the chain of early seventeenth
century Spanish and Portuguese documents on the same subject
and, by a thorough and ingenious p1•ocess o:E correlation ancl
cross-checking, separates the original from the derivative, the
reliable from the fanciful. On the picture thus derived of sixteenth
century Angkor (and Cambodia) he brings to bear relevant
evidence from the Khmer chronicles and epigra.phy and from
archaeology (meaningfully interpreted as "the methodical
examination of the subsoil"). The net result is to reduce the
margin of error in chronology (rightly recognized as ths indispensihle
framework of histm•y) to a minimum and to extract the
maximum of information from the source material, which data
are then made to tell their story within the cultural, economic
and religious pattern of the country. Short of remarlrable new
discoveries, which tl.ppear nn1ikely in the near future, this book
should prove definitive for the period covered, for some time to
come.
'fhe methodical discussion of the finer points of dating
may not appeal to the general reader, bn t even the non-specialist
can hardly fail to be gripped by the tale of the rediscovery of
Angkor-the Rome of the East in its heyday- some hundred
and twenty years after its abandonment in 1431, the reinstallation
of the Khmer court in the ruins for a decade or two in the
second half of the sixteenth century, and the final reversion of

194 BOOK REVIEWS
the city to the ju'ngle and t.o legendary obSClll'ity, from which it
was to be wrested only in the present century by the monumental
efforts of the French.
Scholars of 'l'hai history, too, and not only the Cambodian
experts for whom the book is primarily intended, wm find
Groslier's work of great value. Contacts between the two countries
at the time may have been mainly military-it will be remembered
that the 'l'hai played a considerable part in the downfall
of Angkor in the fourteenth century-but there is a clear intermeshing
of source matel'ial from both sides when a date in
eithet· country hns to be determined.
One is struck, too, by the innumerable points of similarity
between life in Cambodia and the pattern in 'l 1 hailand at that
time. There is the same absolute, but precarious political regime,
and the unwillingness of the peasants to grow more than necessary
for subsistence because of the royal power to dispose of the
land. 'l'here is the same emphasis on the capture of wild
elephants, on the phenomenon of floating rice and the merry.
making accompanying the harvesting. In both countries, the
Catholic missionaries showed an equally intemperate zeal in in~
tervening in local matters, and the kings too great a readiness to
try to use religion as a means of gaining the patronage of one or
other of the European powers. Lastly, European adventure1•s,
though of different calibres, form a common element in the political
landscape of the two lands. These and other similarities may
help to throw light on some of the points in Thai history which
need clarification, and vice versa.
Groslier observes ( p. 164:) with t•estraiued regret the
complete lack of interest on the part of the Portuguese and
Spanish missionaries in the local flora, fauna, and mores. In the
seventeenth century, Thailand was, to that extent at least, more
fortunate in its visitors. They were for the most part French,
and their curiosity was h1satiab!e. Unfortunately, their descriptions
are fat· from having been methodically examined, and much
of the :relevrmt ~aterbl has not eve:p. be~n t~nblishecl. lt is greatly

BOOK REVIEWS 195
to be hoped that this country will benefit in the near future from
such thorough and enlightening studies as the work now contributed
by the French schol(l.t' on Cambodia. In this connection we
must enter a slight caveat against Gros1ier's reference (p. 27) to
"the wealth of research on the missionaries in Thailand." The
material as such is t•icher than that for Cambodia, but most of it.
is confined to the period from Hi65 to about 1700. 'l'he few do cu.
men ts published are almost a1l in de Laun ay's great work on the
French Foreign Missions in Thailand (which excludes the Jesuits)
and in the Lettres Ed1:jiantes et Ourieuses (which is confined to
the latter order). But, be it said without dis1•espect to de Launay,
his selection and use of these documents is not as critical as it
might be, and in any case he does not set out to extract, the rich
historical material contained in them, since his book is a history
of missions and not of a country. Incidentally, it is surely a little
exaggerated of Groslier to talk (p. 125) of the "success" of the
Catholic missions in Thailand; the missionaries themselves
frequently dwell on the lack of response to their efforts.
'l'hree more points. Groslier has some doubts as to the
acmll'acy of the statement by the French missionary Ohevreul
that pilgrimEl came to Angkor from as far afield as Tenasserim.
But that town (and the province of th~ same name) came immecli:ttely
in importance after Ayudhya at the time-Bangkok being
a mere hamlet, albeit with a key fort. There seems no reason
ct prior1: why the Buddhists of this rich area should not have
sent delegates to the great shrine, just like the other centres of
the whole region.
On page 144, Groslie1• asks whether pepper was unknown
in Cambodia in the sixteenth century. In probably was not (just
as it was not common in Thailand, apart from the southern pro.
vinces until late in the seventeenth century), but a firm answer
to his query can certainly be obtained from the French manuscript
material which contains frequent accounts of the trading
positiop. in Camboclia, as well as a good deal of other information.

196 BOOK REVIEWS
Lastly, tlie French writer wonders ( p. 156) whether
Mambaray, the King's Chief Minister at the court of Cambodia,
is not derived from "montrei." Another explanation may he
sought in the fact that, according to Choisy, the corresponding
post at Ayudhya was called Ommarat (i.e., Maha Uparat.) 1
It only remains to note that, in a work where the author
moves with ease in a dozen languages, the only one where he
occasionally appears to hesitate is German. It is rare to see such
a carefully prepared text.
cfl. {gairncross
Modern Indictn PoeM'!/, A.V. Rajeswara Rao, editor. Kuvita Press,
New Delhi, 1958. 144 Pages.
It is maintained by some people that a nation in order to
qualify as such requires homogeneity of culture. This is a
plausible viewpoint if the definition of culture is wide enough
to include not only language, customs and religion, but common
history, past achievements, future ambitions, level of intellectual
refinement, stresses of environment, a sense of purpose, the
sharing of a basic modicum of values and the possession of a
oneness which is both voluntary and fulfilling. The book under
review seeks to bring out this definition of culture.
India is a country with a variety of languages, religions
and customs. Yet if one were to study the strains of society
which move the soul of India, as expressed in all her various
languages, one encounters an emotional experience which is
common and universal, and, when a1l is said and done, a very
1. Since this review was written, I have had the good fortune to
read Professor Coedes• review of the same book in journal Asiatique (CLXL V,
1957, number 4.) in which, p. 414, the eminent scholar makes the same
point, but with his usual erudition and preciseness. According to Professor
Coedes, the title indicates • 'the heir to the throne" and not the
Chief Minister.

BOOK{REV!EWS 197
pl'ized heritage of India as a whole. Oolonisers luwe played
upon differences of culture in order to perpetuate their rnle.
But ever since tho day of India's independence there has been
a new upsurge in the nation, bringing together and pooling the
talents and capabilities, the long-felt stresses and strains of
various language groups, all of which has emphasized the theme
of common heritage. Today we find a growing number of translations
being made from one language to another, and these efforts
are commanding larger audiences and greater patronage tha.n.
ever before. 'l'he spirit that moves this effort may well be
termed a "Renaissance of Reacquaintance." Modern Indian
Poet·ry is a notable contribution to this effort and it, is a refreshingly
delightful anthology. It includes seventy-five works of
seventy poets from fourteen different languages, including
English, but excluding Sanskrit.
As one would expect, the collection includes wol'l~s
tonelting on almost all coneei vab1e topics. There are sorue
choice pieces of pure romanticism ,in the cla~sical style, a liberal
sprinlding of ve1·ses in a philosophical vein, a few attempt~ in
rhyme arising ont of the hopes and frustrations of the present
generation, one or two poems "seeing the light of morning in
the eyes of New India," some of which satirize social inhibitions
and some of which pay due reverance to l'eligion; a1so included
are a few political poems which are forcefully rendered. But
the most popular subject is romance, This is revealed in the
poetry of a tortured mind seeking solace in fantasy, or of an
ultra-sensitive but mature mind reacting to the burdens of life
in mel'low, soft and tender tones. The POIJularity of the
romantic theme in almost all languages is staggering, but it does
not reveal anything new. If exercise in imagination is taken
to be synonymous with complaisance, one need only look at
Amrita Pritam's poem on the tragedy of the Punjab which uses
classical symbolism to describe a political upheavel.
This book is one of the most intelligent and comprehensive
attempts to present a total picture of Indian poetry at the
present time. The value of sneh an attempt in terms of cultural

Hl8
11001

lldOK REViEWS 199
1'.:13. Sayre, Glad Adventure. '£he Macmillan Oo.; New York, 1957,
356 pages.
The book covers a long career of public service; which
in spite of its author's label as a fai1ure! has been vai·ied and
successful. Born of what he himself terms 'a railroading family'
in Pennsylvania, his marriage with President Woodrow Wilson's
daughter brought him iuto a family circle where he could se~
with clarity the public life of an idealist head of state who made
his idealism felt all over the world at the time of the conlusion
of the first world war. His calling was law, which he taught
at Harvard. He was then offered the advisership in foreign
affairs to the Siamese government, which was then directly
presided over by King Rama VI. 'rhe main problem then was
the liberation of the Siamese nation from treaty-shackles which
encroached upon the nation's sovereignty, such as the limitation
of her jurisdiction and her fiscal rights. Woodrow Wilson's
idealism and magnanimity led to the United States' initiative
in surrendering the oppressive treaty-rights mentio11ed above.
Sayre, acting upon his initiative, tackled leading statesmen of
Europe one by one and won for Siam the jurisdiction and fiscal
rights, thus entitling her to full sovereign status in the world
family of nations.
Dr. Sayre's narrative carries us further to later events in
his career-his resumption of teaching at Harvard University
which had merely loaned him for a time to His Mthjesty King
Rama VI, his being called upon by his own government to rule
over the Philippines in the name of the United States government,
his graphic experience in World War II whilst in the
Philippines, his work on the various post-war organisations such
as that on the trusteeship Council of the United Nations, his
missions to different parts of the wor1cl in support of national

200 BOOK REVIEWS
independence of ·subject peoples, ending up with a thought·
pl'ovoldng chaptet· named "The Path Ahead."
'J'he more legitimate duty of this review is of comse the
two chapters 011 his work in Siam. 'l'hough somewhat marred by
slips of detail the book reveals clearly the figure of a most
likeable personality, a cleau-living and devout Christian and a
liberal humanist.
Bangkok, 18 July .1959.
Jmt1·nal of the B1wma Resear•ch Soc1:ety, Vol XLI, pts I & II,
Decem her 1955, pp. 1-117.
For obvious reasons the .Journal is of special interest fot·
this part of the world. The number under review commences
with Standards for Ngapi, dealing with an irnportant. article of
food which is widely usec'l in Burma and Siam in the form of a
paste. The standard proposed here is that there should not be
moJ•e than 40% water and 20% sodium chloride. It should moreover
contain at least 60% prot.ein and 5% fat and sodium chloride.
Next is 1 1 he a~tlUvatm•'s Contribution to Literature. It is not
limited to scientific treatment of paddy, sesamum and groundnuts,
but its references to proverbs, etc., are interesting. Thus it says
''The a1·my is always on the look-out (for insurgents since 1948) and
wherever fighting ensues poor cultivators suffer loss of life and
property. So the victims of insurrections grnmble in low voices,
'when two buffaloes fight the myeza grass beneath them is unable
to withstand them'." 'l'he saying has a parallel in our language
which compares hoi polloi to prek grass being trodden under
when men fight.

BOOK REVIEWS 201
U Lu Pe Win's Aspects of Burmese Culture (pp. 19.36) ia
a schola1•ly resume of the latest data in Burmese historical
resea1•ch prior to the XIth century, cornmencii1g with the Pyu
culture of Sril>shetra, V-VIIIth centm•ies, going on to the Mon
from whom their conquerors, the Burmese, adopted much of
their culture.
Dr. Than 'run's Social Life in BU?·ma, A.D. 1044-1281, takes
the nal'l'ative up from where the last article left off.
Then follow two articles of technical interest in mineral.
ogy and botany by Maung Ba Shein and Daw Thanda Pe,
respectively. Then Mon Litm·ature and O·ulture's Influence over
Thaaand and Burma by Nai Pan Hla which should appeal to
local readers here, though its presentation might have been
clearer. We learn, however, among other clata of interest how
the Mon came over the seas to this side of the Indian Ocean
and set up at least two centres, one at Thaton and the other in
the land of Dvaravati, and how the Burmese under Anawratha
and Kyansitha subjugated them at Thaton. The article ends up
with a survey of the status of the present-day Mon.
Maung Nu's short account of Burma is of interest. It is
of course modern Burma which he describes, more especially with
regard to her economic and social aspects.
The Journal is brought up at the end by a report of Drs,
Tha Hla and Nyi Nyi, dealing with field work in archeology at
Hmaza (Srikshetra) and Prome, which is followed by Professor
Hall's biographical sketch of Henry Burney, the "Diplomat and
Orientalist.''
Huahin, 81 May 1959.
en.

202 BOOK REVIEWS
A. Ghosh, Jndian'Archeology, 1967-B, a t•eview. 114 pages, 125 illustrations.
This report for the public of the Archeological Department
of the Indian Government is a useful summary of the considerable
activities in the period under review. It of course covers the
whole of India. It has brought to fresh light many historical
monuments which had been buried and unknown, among which
may be mentioned the ancient Harappa culture which has been
discovered fa1• down the west side of India beyond the Narmadda
estuary. Of particular interest to readers in Buddhist Siam would
be the excavations of the Ganga plains, among which have been
unearthed the high brick walls of Kausambi, the pre-Mauryan
stitpa of Vaisali-perhaps one of the eight monuments bnilt. after
the Buddha's death to enshrine portions of his relics from the
crematory pyre. Important discoveries have also been made on
the site of Nagarjunakonda which reveal its history dating from
the early stone age.
'l'he main sections of the report are those concerning the
explorations and excavations, epigraphy, numismatics, and
treasure troves, museums, archeological surveys of temples, with
a list of new publications of the Department. 'l'he plates are well.
reproduced and valuable maps help to clarify the subject-matter.
Bangkok, 10 September' 1969.
CJJ.
W.F. Vella, The Impect of the West on Govm'nment in Thailand,
University of Oalifornia Publications in Political Science, Vol. 4-,
No.3, 1955. pp. i-iv, 317-410.
This Jou·rnal reviewed a short while ngo Walter Vella's
Barna III, which was really a later publication than this volume.
The latter had not bee11 brou~ht to the notice of the Editorial
Committee,

BOOK REVIEWS 203
It is evident here that the aui;hor has 1:ead much, though
it is to be regretted that his authorities include dubious material
long known as mere propaganda. Commencing with a carefully
summed-up chapter on the "Traditional Pattern of Government
in Thailand" as a background of his presentation, the work goes
on to a chapter on the "Adoption of Western Technique," from
1851-1910, covering the fourt.h and fifth reigns of the Bangkok
period. 'l.'hen a chapter on ''Democratic Trends" of the sixth and
seventh reigns; then another on the "Establishment of Constitutional
Government," followed by one on the "Decline of Constitutionalism,"
and finally "Prospects for Democratic Government."
Though carried away by a-perhaps natural-sympathy in the
intervening chapters, his conclusions in the final one are sound
and logical. It would serve no purpose to try to cor1·ect the angles
from which the subject has been viewed. Suffice it to say that one
cannot help thinking that even an academically qualified writer
is liable to lose sight of the r·aison d'etre of institutions which
has served the nation for centuries and brought it, not without a
great deal of anxiety and sacrifice, to the status of membership
in the family of nations at the end of World War I, which steered
it through its scylla and charybdis till it was suddenly caught in
a storm from within which made it founder, while it was trying
to realise the su,mmon bombm of the West.
In reading the work
under review we seem to be losing sight of whatever were the
accomplishment of former days, of the steady adaptation of
western culture and technique, of the generous initiative of America
in helping us to negotiate and realise sovereignty within our own
lands, not only one of the former de jure type but also one of
the de facto type, too. Most of the picture left on one's mind
after reading thiB book contains but little more than revolution,
strife, jealousies and cor1•uption.
]3angkak 1 1.6 September 1959.

204 BOOK REVIEWS
Govm·nments and Politics of Southea8t Asia, G.M. Kahin, editor;
various authors. Cornell University Press, New Y01·k, 1959. 531
pages.
'l'he work has been published under the auspices of the
Southeast Asia Program of Cornell University, ilealing with the
six larger of the nations of Southeast Asia: Thailand, Burma,
Indonesia, Malaya with Singapore, Vietnam, with a section at
the end on Communist Vietnam and the Philippines. The
authors are, in respective order of their writing, David A. Wilson,
former teacher and lecturer at Chulalongkorn University and
latterly fellow of the Ford Foundation Foreign Area Training
Program; Josef Silverstein of the Ford Foundation Foreign Area
Training Program and Fulbright Program; Herbert Feith, who
after service with the Republic of Indonesia became a research
associate in political science of the Cornell Modern Indonesia
Project; J. Norman Parmer, who has carried out research in
Malaya under the auspices of the New York State School of the
Industrial and Labour Relations at Cornell University; Wells
0. Klein, anthropologist, fellow of the Ford :Foundation l!'oreign
Area 'rraining Program with Marjorie Weiner, a political
scientist who has served in Vietnam with the Education Division
of the United States Operation Mission, and David Wurfel who
has carried out research in the Philippines as a fellow of the
Ford l!'oundation Po reign Area '!'raining Program.
The work has been systematically planned, each part
devoted to one of the nations, consisting of chapters on the
historical background, the contempot•ary setting, the political
process and a final one on major problems, with an extra chapter
in the case of Vietnam on the northern state. A clear, serviceable
map is also attached to each part. The editor points out
that Southeast Asia is not an area of great political homogeneity,
going on to say that ". . . differences in their traditional
cultures ~md in their colonial and postcolonial histories have
produced substantially dissimilar results, and any close scrutiny
of their contemporary governments and politics will disclose at
least as many important differences as similarities.'' Only six
nations are here treated, but it is hoped that others like Cam.
bodia will follow.

BOOK REVIEWS 205
Obviously our main interest lies in the· first part, dealing
with Thailand. The historical bacl{ground forming the first
section concerns modern history with a very brief sketch of
what had preceded since the entry of the Thai into what is
Siam. 'l'he conception of kingship pl'ior to the midcUe of the
XIXth century is somewhat exaggera,ted ill its streRS on ceremony
rmd self-preservation. In fact, historical data are carefully
marshalled, though they are not altogether understood in
correet proportions. The second and third sub-sections dealing
with the period of the modern Absolute Monarchy ( 1851-19B2)
are well-written and contain very few inaccuracies. The minutely
detailed sub-section on the revolution of 1932 a11d its aftet•maths
and "post-war Thailand" may be called authoritative and
hardly to be equalled by any other works yet available. The
author wrote naturally from local sources bnt seems to be, as far
as is possible, impartial.
Under contemporary setting much material has been
gathered which are not met with elsewhere, dealing with
economy, social setting, political forces and political ideas. Here
again, unlike many similat• treatises of recent years, even
academic publications, t,his may be said to be ou the wholE'
accurate.
The thircl section, dealing with the political process,
apparently the main topic of each of these parts, is the author's
pl'OilOuncement. Like several of the six nations here treated,
the "written document (of the Constitution) receives none of the
veneration which is accorded the American Constitution .."
He goes on to say that "the introduction of the document was
itself revolutionary, and, contary to the concept of orderly
constitutional procedures. In such a setting it is to be expected,
perhaps, that the document's force is not dominant." 'rhe
reviewer, not being a politician but a mere historian, is inclined
to wonder whether the veneration for the American Constitution
which was also introduced through revolutionary means received
at that time similar veneration as it does today when it has
been in usage for quite a consi

206 BOOK Rl!!ViEWS
and last section deals with major problems, among which th!:!
treatment of those of the Chinese minority deserves mention
for its handling of the subject based on the writing of Dr. Skinner.
'rhe remaining five parts have been systematically
written on similar lines and division of tt·eatment. It. is proposed
here to review them not in the succession of their presenta•
tion bn t to talre each of the sections of each part together.
Under "Historical Background," we have a comparatively
short notice of that of Burma. There are quite a few topics
regarding Indonesia to be taken notice of. Of the nature of
Indonesia's geography the author says: "Because it straddles the
world's largest and most scattered archipelago, Indonesia as a
unit must do battle with geography to maintain itself." Like
the four other states which have recently attained independence,
it is said of Indonesia that colonial administration is naturally
followed by the desire for independence. 'l'he Philippines on
the other hand went through a peaceful transition to selfgovernment
and independence and this has dulled the cut.ting
edge of contemporary nationalism. The historical background
of Vietnam is well presented, too.
Under "Contemporary Setting" and the "Political Process"
the main topic of each part is the respective development of
democracy and constitutionalism.
"Major Problems" as a rule is a more interesting and
broader subject than the last two. In the part dealing with Siam
it is the problem of the Chinese minority. In Burma the main
difficulty would seem to be national unity, fo1· the Union of Burma
has been formed out. of conflicting racial elements, SOllie quite
antagonistic to the Burmese. In Malaya it is the problem of the
large Chinese minority, part of which however has identified
itself with the land of its residence. In Vietnam it is the problem
of economy and the proximity of their northern communist coufrEn'es
whose separate state is dealt with in a sub-section of its
own.
CJJ.

RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
245. Narabhipal, Nai: Verses and the sebha of Praya Ko"J
.;. _, o rvfl' A
a:d Pmya P'an, L'VJM~U"vvJ'Vl~l'l'l~'IJ'VJ~flJU1tl'UT'lfllJ1rcl LLICl~l~.fl1
LTfl\IWT~tl1fl..'JWT~U1W11J Preka1•cha1J Press, Bangkok, 2501, llP· 95.
These writings from the pen of the late Nai Narii.bhipii.l
were published for presentation at the cremation of the remains
of the author. By profession secretary to the late Prince of Nakon
Swarn he made his name in the literary world by his poetry, some
of which ( pp. 17-51) a1•e included in the volume. His style was
elegent and his rhetodc was of the classical type.
The publication also includes n feature of historical interest-the
metrical narration, or sebha, of the story of Kings KolJ
and Pan. The late Nai Narahhipii.l published this in some magazine
in 1924, with a preface which says that the original russ. in
his possession were written on old black folios, and, judging from
its calligraphy, might have been written down from dictation in
the fourth reign of the Bangkok era. It was then ( 1924) published
with the intention of preserving old poetry. The gist of
the story is as follows:
Once upon a time there was a king known as Sikii., reigning
in B.E. 400 over Kampeusen. He had a son named Kou to
whom he entrusted the administration of his realm. He asked for
the hand of the daughter of the King of Pejraburi for his son.
When the old monarch died at the age of 90, his successor, Kou,
renamed the state Srivijaya. In clue course of time the queen gave
birth to a son. The royal baby's head knocked against the receptacle
known as a pan at the time of its birth, leaving an indeli-
ble mark on the forehead. Hence he came to be known as Pan.
Unfortunately the court astrologer pronounced him a prospective
patricide and the baby was left to die in a bamboo thicket out.
side the town.
At that time there happened to have been an old woman,
Yai Hom, living near, who noticed birds of prey flocl{ing round
,

208 RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
the bamboo thick.et. Coming up to the place she found the lmby,
and snatched it from the birds. The baby grew up under her
loving cme to the age of H>, when he persuaded the olcl woman
to let him wander away in sea1•ch of knowledge and experience
in life. With :five companions he wandered from town to town till
they got to Sukhodaya in the north. Taking refuge l~t Wat Yai
under the tutelage of its abbot, Pii.n served his aged namesake
who taught him lessons ns was then usual. He was eventually
ordained as a monk when of age, but after a ti.me preferred a
layman's life which he obtained the abbot's permission to resume.
There happened to have been an elephant in musth, which no
one was able to keep in order. In a spirit of adventure Pan tried
his hand at the difficult task; and snbduecl the beast by pushing
his tuslrs into the ground, thereby earning a reputation in the
n01•thern capital, ancl an employment in the King's service. At
the instigation later of the King of Snkhodaya, Pan volunteered
to lead. an expedition to the south to conquer Praya KolJ, whom
he naturally did not know was his father; and, engaging that
monarch in single combat on elepant, he ldl1ec1 him. Entering
the palace with the intention of taking his late enemy's queen to
wife, he heard and understood a cat telling her kitten not to
heed his bad manners in stepping over its head because, she said,
the newcomer was uncultured enough to take his own mother to
wife and hence could not be expected to be good in manners.
Wondering over what he was hearing, he prayed for some indication
of the real truth; and, lo! at his approach milk flowed out of
the breasts of the queen, thus enabling him to identify her as
his mother. Angered at having committed a patricidal act., and
blaming Yai Hom for not telling him of the identity of his
father he sent for her and had her killed. Then, feeling the
remorse of the double act of ingratitude, he erected the stupa, of
Pra Fathom in atonement. So far the story here complies with
other versions of the tale of Praya KolJ and Praya Pan.
The narration proceeds now to reeount that King Pan
changed the name of: his state :t:rorn. Srivijaya to Nalwn Jaisri,

RECENT StAMESE PUBLICATIClNS
When he died, the overlord at Sukhodaya was told by one of his
senior con rtiers that Pan was descended from an old lineage of
I
the south. The ancestor named Men ruled from K£tmp01JSen, now
a small village north of Nakon Pathom; his successor Kala added
embellishments to the capital; the third in line was SYldi. whose
son KolJ comes into om· story. KolJ renamed his state Srivijaya.
Pan, who changed the name of his state again to Nakon Jaisri,
is thus the fifth of the dynasty, and its last, for he had no issue.
The southern state was left to ruin till the overlord of Sukhodaya
came down south to inspect it. He founded a new capital called
S6lJpan, i.e., The Oity oj the 'l'wo Thousand, because he left his
younger brother to rule over the south with a force of 2,000 men.
Eventually a King of Sukhodaya, named Pall, married his son to
a daughter of the King of S61Jpan.
Then follows a story which is almost identical with the
romance of Khun OhO.lJ and Khun Ph0n, with its locale in Sonpan
and Kanblui, but with slightly different names for the
principals. We have here Can for the Phen of the romance; Bua,
the 'Bone~head', for Khun OhalJi 1'olJprasi, name in the romance
of the hero's mother, for the heroine Pim. The gist is identical,
without, details of the romance, and it ends up with a campaign
hy Can in which he c:onqnered the Mon at Pra Pathon1.
The narration of events after the death of King Pan is
not to be found in any history. When coupled with the story of
those leading citizens of So-n(nm which follows it, it becomes
really interesting fol' historical researches. These are of course
mere traditions but traditions are often useful in the solution of
problems of history. The problem of the lineage of the founder
of Ayudhya is an historical one which has up to now never been
solved to everybody's satisfaction. What we have here does not
yet solve it but may go some way towards elucidation. Let us
now go into the facts tts they are given in t.he story :
(a) As to place~names, we are told here that, Kam:PelJseu
was the capital of a state on the lower reaches of what is now
known as the Nakon Jaisri river-the site being· known by that

210 RECE~T SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
name, though n~thing in the way of ruins of age is left. Old
records usually speak of a state by the name of its capital and
in this case we ought to be safe in regarding the name as that of
the state as well as that of its capital. The name was then
changed to Srivijaya three reigns later. As far as we can make
out the change might have been possible but we would be as
likely as not incorrect H we hold fast to the period specifiedthree
reigns Ol' say three generations. 'l'he name was then
changed to Nakon Jaisri, and then to Sc>!;)J5an. Obviously Sfil.)pan
became Supan later but this does not appear in our story. This
of course contradicts to a cert.ain extent the theory hitherto
prevalent of place-names in the Land of Gold, for Supan would
be a mere corruption of Sonpan. If we discard, however, the story
of the 2,000 men, and assume that the original name wa.s SniJan,
merely corrupted into Sou:Pan, then the old theory might hoM.
It iH almost just as probable.
(b) It introduces us to the connection with Sukhodaya
which did not appear in other tales of lCOIJ and :Pan. rrb.e King
of Sukhodaya's name is given as Pii.liraj-King Pii.li. Now Pii.lT
could not have been a man's name, much less so if he were a
king, since the name is well-known as one of t.he monkey King
of Khitkhin in the story of Rii.ma of Ayudhya. rrhere were,
however, two kings of Sukhodaya in history named Ban or Hal
Mi.ialJ. which could be corrupted into Pan or Pal.
One was the
second of the line of the Pra RuttlJ, son of Sri lndradityn and
elder brother of the famous Ram Khamhen of the inscriptions.
The other was a son of the reigning monarch who died in 1419
(History version of Lna.u Prasroeth) and fought his way to the
throne of Sukhodaya but had to submit to King lndaraja of
A.yndhyii. Sukhodaya inscription No. XII ( ht Ooedes' Reoueil des
Inso?·ipMons, Vol. I, 1924) also mentions a Palu as sponsoring the
erection of a footprint in that capital in 1427.
These were probably
one and the snme PS.la. This latter date may be conformable
with the date of the incident of the romance mentioned above.

REGENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS 211
(c) It also introduces ns to the romance mentioned above
of Khun OhalJ and Khun l)hen with different names :f:or the
principals.
It is curious thnt this romance should be added to what
purports to be a history. The addition might have been clue to
the fact that the narrator w'lshes to c"laim connection with the
state or township of Sbupan. In that case one would be inclined
to suspect that the whole poem was composed by an inhabitant
of Supan or Sbupan who thus traces the history of his locality.
246. Chitrapous. Pl"incess Duaucit : Monast?:c Fans
o.I-
P'l1fi:'l1J[Ilj' Praaand Press, Bangkok, 2502, copiously ill., pp. 129.
The work is a dedication to her late mother, the Princess
Naris, at the cremation of whose l'emains it was distributed to
guests. The author having been the constant companion of her
father, no one else could have been more familiar with the late
royal artist's works and artistic creations. She also contributed
a biography of her late mother as is usual in such dedications,
from which contribution one leat'DS that the late Princess was
her husband's tt·usted and sympathetic partner with much taste
in arts and crafts.
The monk's fan js ::m old institution, though pe1'haps it
has been more developed in this country than in other Buddhist
nations, for it has assumed here an official character in being
utilised to signa1ise the bearer's office and rank in the Siamese
Buddhist Church. It is here bestowed upon individual mon1\S
by the Sove1•eign, just as titles and decoutions are upon officials
of the laity. The author gives all details as to the various
ranl\s of the official honorific fans with short descriptions of
their shapes and design. In supplement to the honorific fans­
'pacl yos' -there is another category of fans-'pad rou '-meaning
supplementary fans which are invariably oval in shape. Being
designed as memorials of personalities or occasions, such as
birthdays, ceremonies not necessarily ones of state, they are
more elastic in conception. The late Prince Naris was an expert

212 RECENT siAM.E!SE PUBLICATioN's
in designing and drawing patterns for these, specimens of
which are copiously reproduced in the worlr under review.
Monastic fans are among the most artistic products of
the national inspiration and are thus to be studied from that
point of view.
247. Ri-iausnwarn, 0.: Feats of He'roism of Uaoiwaya
~ ~
.Bodindradefa ( 8ir;h 8ir;haseni ), fJJf1Hl-.IJJ1~Plfi'U']tJ.:J'Vl1'1W'i1
'jloJj~U'JlJ;'U'Vl1LWll1 (~~'VI ~~'VIl©~) Panijya-caroen Press, Dhonburi,
2502, pp. 83.
One of the heroes of the early Bangkok regime, who was
now and again sent to pacify the north-east and east borders,
is the principal flgnre in this sketch. The soldier-statesman
was born in 1777 and died at the age of 72. His had a varied
disposition. He was extremely humane in peace; a strict displinarian
in war, not even sparing his own son from capital punishment;

RECEN1' SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS 213
that Buddhism discourages economic progress for it preaches
contentment; not a few might say that they ha-ve followed all
their lives the theory that one's action, good ot• bad, brings
corresponding results and yet they have never reaped due
reward, whilst those whose behavion1• is nowhere near exemplary
reap every prize. This category of people would claim that
Buddhism is at fault. Then there is a great number who seem
to think that the way to national progress lies in an equality
in property and class- an idealogy which is unnatural and un­
Bnddhist. Right and freedom may be equalised but there can
be no control of individual spending and saving. Effect depends
on cause and that was why the Buddha never attempted to
preach equalisation of man's individual status.
It seems therefore that such convictions, so far from the
Master's ideal, can only result in the deterioration of the
rational philosophy enunciated by the Budclha. His teaching
was in fact the very opposite of a static life. Take for instance
his theory of mundane welfare which would answer these
grumblingfl. Besides, progress should not be confined to the
material side

214 RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
anything which may possibly lead to sacrilege in that neither
Prince Siddhartha nor the Buddha appears on the stage, merely
their voices being heard, or their hands Ol' feet being visible.
This preface is in many ways the most interesting
section of the whole volume, enunciating, as it does, the author's
philosophy of life and progress. One has the impression that
the "Dialogue with Dances" has been written to preach it. The
handling of his subject, despite a few inaecuracies due to
ignorance of Pali such as calling Prince Siddhartha's consort by
a masculine form of the name, is carried out with delicacy and
charm. His philosophy, though shared by or identical with
t.hat of many modern Buddhists, is not yet generally accepted
by the majority. It is nevertheless logical.
The main feature of inter•est from a reader's point of
view is undoubtedly Act II scene 5, where the author portrays
the nascent sage's inward struggle for the Truth by personifying
abstract phenomena. Thus the element of knowledge appears
on the stage as Oittavimutti, clothed in white, which carries on
a long dialogue with the Buddha ( pp. 70-136 ). This is obviously
meant for 1·eading and not staging. TherE' are some other
personifiecl abstractions also, such as Dukkham, Aniccam, Anatta
and Karma. Evil, of com•se, has already been personified in
traditional versions and he appears here as Mara with his
tempting, sensuous daughters. This lengthy reading matter is
followed by by the First Sermon of the Deer Park at Var§.nasi
in Act III, Sc. 2 ( pp. 160-194 ). Every act is prefaced with a
scene in which an old man introduces the subject of the coming
Act through a dialogue with his grandson in the manner of the
Shakespearean chorus in some of the poet's plays.
The musical items show a deep appreciation of Siamese
classical music. There is real skill and charm in their application
to the developments of action and narrative.
249. Nai Kaew: Record of the tour of the south by H.R.H.
ol
the Crown Prince in R.S. 128 ( UllO) I'HlVll-J1tHVli"H~~I"l1.lT::'W1~
,

Vl";L~'fl.:J~1t11~ j,fj, lflilna:J "1
Bangkok, 2502, pp. 228.
RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATiONS
Z15
King Monglmt ' Academy Press;
King Rama VI, when Crown Prince, made a tour of the
south as far as 'rrang and Nalwn Sri .Dharmaraj for 54 clays.
Gifted with the use of his pen though hardly fluent as yet in it
from his long sojourn from childhood in Europe, he seemed to have
been unable to resist writing a serles of letters of travelogue
during a trip which was strenuous for its social commitments.
His lettl;}rs were addressed to 'Pran Bun.' primarily to be
published in a club magazine called "Ohuan Hna," i.e., the
Humorist; but, in his own words, "the material multiplied in
volume as the series progressed till it was now felt that readers
of the magazine would be kept too long waiting for each serial."
It was then decided to publish the letters in book form.
As was his habit in some instances the Prince wrote as a
member of his own suite, adopting "Nai Kaew" as a nom de
plume. Obviously the expediency gave him broader scope. He
certainly had difficulties in the language bnt he kept clear of
foreign words which at that time were fashionable for would-be
progressives who thereby attempted to display their ''up-todate"
command of the widely known language of the West even
to the detriment of their own.
The journey was made by sea from Baugkok to Jumporn;
then by elephant across the isthmus of Kra to Ranong; by sea
thence to Takuapa, Bhuket, PaiJIJii, Krabi, and Tra;u; by motorcars
and horses across the peninsula again via TniJSO:U to Nalwn
Sri .Dharmara,j, whence the return to Bangkok was resumed
by sea.
As a travelogue it is adequate, touching on scenery, and
the life of the people of the distdcts passed through. It also
gives an idea of the pleasures and hardships of the party,
permitting the reader to get a glimpse of the intimacy which
the Prince shared with his entourage, incidentally revealing,
without the writer saying it, the lovable nat.ure of the Prince.
However out-of-date its account of the topography has become

RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATiONS
by this time, its record of customs and of personalities are still
interesting. We learn for instance of the Chinese tin-prospecting
and mercantile family of na Ranong, one of the members of
which became Praya Rasada, Lord Lieutenant of Bhuket circle,
consisting of all the provinces on the Indian Ocean, a benevolent
despot and a real acquisition for Siam.
250. Devawongs, H.R.H. Somdec Kromapraya: 'The Family
of Sucaritak,ul ~1~ ..... 1J~fl'i:'l i&l'lJi'lfl'i:'l King Monglmt Academy P1·ess,
Bangkok, 2502, pp. 65.
l 1 1
Together with the foregoing book, no. 349, this publication
has been dedicated to the memory of Prayii. Udom Rajabhal{di, a
member of that family once Major Domo of the Court of King
Rarna VI. It was, according to the introduction, written by the
lfl.te Prince whose name is mentioned above. Both the Prince'H
mother and wife belonged to this family. Prince Devawongs,
however, did not bring the book to completion and tho work was
continued by some of his sons and daughters aud published in
March 1938 on the occasion of the cremation of the remains of
Her late Royal Highness the Princess of Oandaburi, daughter by
Mom Yai (nee Sucaritalml) of Somdec Kromapraya Devnwongs.
The publication under review has been continued from that ea1·1ier
work by the children of the late Prnya Udom Rajahhakdi and
includes families related by marriage with the Sncaritakuls.
It is made up of family trees and lists of mem hers of the
families mentioned. It is noticeable that the family counts among
its membership, both direct and related, several queens and distinguished
ladies of the Kingdom.
251. Birasri, Prof. S.: Appreciation of Mt?' Murals FlnLFl1
~
""
'lltJ\I~Pl:fnJj':J..J~1tJ'W~ Sivaporn Press, Bangkok, 2502, 40 pp. with
map and i1lust1·ations.
'fhis is the current year's publication by the Royal Fine
Arts Department to celebrate every year the Buddhist observance
of Monastic Retreat. Some 10,000 copies have been issued for

RECENT SIAMESE PUDLICA'l'IONS 217
distribution to monks and novices visiting the .National Museum
on that day, others being presented to individuals, museums,
libraries and learned institutions.
The department has this year organised an exhibition of
Thai murals collected or copied from various places in the king.
dom. A chronological list of the murals is given, dating from
the Srivijaya paintings in the cave at Yala, B.E. 1830 (late XIIIth
century, Chr. era).
'rhe professot· begins by explaining the three systems of
mural painting, tempera, fresco and encaustic, going on to what
may be gained by studying murals, their aims, the western influence
in art and material, the artist's objectives, the method of
learning to appreciate murals of different kinds such as those
depicting religious scenes or fant,astic moods or dynamic action
as in the Ramakien, those depicting natural life and scenes of
hell, carrying messages of warning to people so that thoy would
avoid sin ancl do good.
The end is brought up by recommendations
for the preservation of murals which decay so soon in a
humid climate.
252. Journal Thailand-Oentre, P. E. N. International,
._...!.
"Bhasa le Navsue" fl1hl1lL~~'Vl'hl~~tl Vol. I, part 1, Kat·pimpstrisar,
Bangkok, 2502, pp. 114.
It is with pleasure that we welcome this new journal,
which is a promising sign of greater interest being taken in
scholarly research in our Siamese circles. As its name implies, it
will be the organ of P.E.N. International, about which an article
appears in this number (pp. 87 .89).
Among the very readable
material we note especially two articles dealing with Thai Unguis.
tics. One is In quest of the Thai Language (pp. 9.16) by Dr. Ban.
cob :Pandhumedha, the locale of whose subject is placea in the
Shan states. The other is S. Oandralekha's Disc•ussion of Languages
of the North-east (pp. 102-107) which is equally worth reading.

RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATiONS
by this time, its record of customs and of personalities are still
interesting. We learn for instance of the Chinese tin-prospecting
and mercantile family of na Ranong, one of the members of
which became :Praya Rasada, Lord Lieutenant of Bhuket circle,
consisting of all the provinces on the Indian Ocean, a benevolent
despot and a real acquisition for Siam.
250. Devawo11gs, B.R.H. Somdec Kromapraya: The Family
of Sucaritakttl ~1~iiJ©flrtl ©"lT~flrtl King Mongknt Academy Press,
1 1 j
Bangkok, 2502, pp. G5.
Together with the foregoing book, no. 349, this publication
has been dedicated to the memory of Prayii. Uclom Rajabhakcli, tt
member of that family once Major Domo of the Oonrt of King
Rarna VI. It was, according to the introduction, written hy the
late Prince whose name is mentioned above. Both the Prince's
mother and wife belonged to this family. Prince Devawong::1,
however, did not bring the book to completion and the work was
continued by some of his sons and daughters and published in
March 1938 on the occasion of the crernatio11 of the remains of
Her late Royal Highness the Princess of Oandaburi, daughter by
Mom Yai (nee Sucaritalm1) of Somdec Kromaprayii Devawongs.
'rhe publication under review has been continued from that earlier
work by the children of the late Praya Udom Rajabhakdi and
includes families related by marriage with the Sncaritalmls.
It is made up of family trees and lists of members of the
families mentioned. It is noticeable that the family counts among
its membership, both direct and related, several queens and distinguished
ladies of the Kingdom.
251. Birasri, Prof. S.: App1•eciation of ou1· JYfurals fltUf'11
"" .... 1
']tJ\Jflilrljfljjl-!~1r.I'U\I Sivaporn Press, Bangkok, 2502, 4,0 pp. with
map and illustrations.
This is the current year's publication by the Royal Fine
Arts Department to celebrate every year the Buddhist observance
of Monastic Retreat. Some 10,000 copies have been issued for

RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS 217
distribution to monks and novices visiting the .National Museum
on that day, others being presented to incli viduals, museums,
libraries and learned institutions.
The department has this year organised an exhibition of
Thai murals collected or copied from various places in the king.
dom. A chronological list of the murals is given, dating from
the Srivijaya paintings in the cave at Yala, B.E. 1830 (late XIIIth
century, Chr. era).
'rhe professor begins by explaining the three systems of
mural painting, tempera, fresco and encaustic, going on to what
may be gained by studying murals, their aims, the western in~
fluence in art and material, the artist's objectives, the method of
learning to appreciate murals of different kinds such as those
depicting religious scenes or fantastic moods or dynamic action
as in the Ramalden, those depicting natural life and scenes of
hell, carrying messages of warning to people so that they would
avoid sin and do good. The end is brought up by recommendations
for the preservation of murals which decay so soon in a
humid climate.
252. Journal 'rhailand-Oentre, P. E. N. International,
._...!.
"Bhasa le Navsue" fl1H1ll~!'l'lU~~tl Vol. I, part 1, KarPimPstrisar,
Bangkok, 2502, pp. 114.
It is with pleasure that we welcome this new journal,
which is a promising sign of greater interest being taken in
scholarly research in om• Siamese circles. A.s its name implies, it
will be the organ of P.E.N. International, about which an article
appears in this number (pp. 87 .89).
A.rnong the Yery readable
material we note especially two articlea dealing with Thai linguistics.
One is In quest of the 'J.lhai Language (pp. 9-16) by Dr. Ban.
cob :Pandhumeclha, the locale of whose subject is placed in the
Shan states. The other is S. Oandralel,ha's Discussion of Languages
of the NO?"th-east (pp. 102-107) which is equally worth reading.

218 RECENT SIAMESE PUBLICATIONS
The literary analysis of a few stanzas of the old Ni1·a8 Haripun.
jaya (pp. 32-34) b-y Dr. P. na Nalwn is a scholarly piece.
So also
is the bi-lingual rendition of Nira's Narindr ( pp. 26-31) of J.
Kasem Sribunruang.
poem.
This latter too does not cover the whole
Folklore is represented by Sathien Koses' Fairy Fru,it
(pp. 17-20) which is written in that author's customary style.
Problems of translation occupy considerable sections of the
magazine (pp. 48-50; 108-114).
Administrative matter such as
reports of meetings and regulations make up the remainder of
the volume.

PUBLICATIONS OF INTEREST IN OTHE'.R JOURNALS
Egeroci!, S.:
Acta Orientalia
Vol. XXIII, 3-4.
Swatow loan-words in Siamese.
Ancient India
No. 14, 1958.
Srinivasan, K.R.: The Pallava A1•chitecture
of South India.
Artibus Asiae
Vol. X.XI, 1958.
Griswold, A.B.: An Unusual Siamese Bronze.
Arts and Letters
Vol. XXXII, 2.
Onisinier, Mlle. J : The Inheritance
of India in Indonesia.
Arts Asiatiques
Tome V, fasc 3, 1958.
137-156.
114-138.
Boisselier, J. : Note sur un bronze thai
recemment acqui par le Musee Gnimet. 228-232.
Viennot, 0. : Le makara dans la decoration des monuments
de l'inde ancienne: positions et fonctions. 183-206.
Bhattacharya, K. : Notes d'iconographie khmere :
nn serie de neuf diemr.
Aussenpolitik
10, 1959.
7-8.
29-33.
220.
Roll, 0.: Das Melwng-projekt in Hinterindien. 248-254.
Bulletin de l'Ecole Franctaise d'E:x:trerne-Orient
rrome XLIX, fasc. 1.
Pamais, L.O. : Etudes d'epigraphie indonesienne:
V. Dates de manuscrits et documents
divers de Java, Bali et Lombok.
l-258.

220 PUBLICATIONS OF IN'l'EREST IN OTHER JOURNALS
Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies, London
Vol. XX, 1957.
Hall, D.G.E.: Burney's Comments on the Court
of Ava, 1832.
Vol. XXI, 1958.
Jaini, Padmanath S.: Buddha's p1•olongation of Life.
Wolters, O.W.:
'ram bralinga.
306-314.
54,6-542.
587-607.
Bulletin de la Societe des Etudes Indochinoises
'l'ome XXXIII, Nos. 1-2.
Oacliero, L. : Oroyances et practiques religieuses des Vi~tnamiens.
whole volume.
No.3.
Marchal, A.: Note sur un theatre d'ombres a Siemreap 251-260.
Azambre, G.: Origine d'Hanoi. 261-300.
Ooedes, G. :
No.4.
Une periode critique dans 1' Asie du
sud-ouest : le xnre siecle.
Bui Quang Tung: Chao Anou, roi de Vientiane a travers
le documents vi~tnamiens.
Hickey, G.:
Problems of social change in Vietnam.
387-400.
401-406.
407-418.
Shiratori, Y.: An historical investigation of ancient Thai. 431-450.
Ooedes, G. :
Civitta Dell' Oriente
Vol. III.
Religioni dell' Indocina (Burma,
Thailand, Cambodia, Laos et Vietnam).
Dhammacakshu
XLIV, 1-2, 1958.
884-899.
Pariyatimoli, Rev. Pra: The authorship of the
Abhidhamma. (in Siamese).
120-139

PUBLiCATIONS OF iNTEREST IN OTHER JOURNALS
East and West
New series: Vol. 9, No.3, 1958.
Murthy, H.V.S.: Was Asoka a Buddhist?
(His answer was that he was neither a
Buddhist nor a Jaina, but a follower of
Sanatana Dhamma or Porana Pakiti, as
he himself had said (in Brahmagiri
edict). One might also say with equal
truth that he subscribed to all three
schools of thought). 230-232.
Encounter
Vol. XI, No. 6, 1958.
Enright, D.J.: The Empire of the English Tongue. 56-61.
France.Asie
'rome X.V, Nos. 146-7, 1958.
Giteau, Madeleine: Aper

222 PUBL!CATIONS OF INTEREST IN OTHER JOURNALS
Indo-Asian Culture
Vol. VII, 1, 1958.
Radhakrishnan, S.: Indian Religious Thought and
Modern Civilisation.
Sen, Dr. A.O.: Ancient India and East and
South-east Asia.
5-:30.
72-81.
Jahrbuch des Museums fur Volkerkunde zu Leipzig
Band XVI, 1957.
Finsterbusch, Kate : Eine Si.idosta.siatische Bronzetrommel
aus clem Museum fur Volkerlmncle zu Leipzig. 19-27.
Journal of the Asiatic Society Letters
Vol. XXII, No. 2, 1956.
Ohatterji, S.K. : The name Assam-Ahom.
147-153.
Journal Asiatique
Tome CCXLVI, fasc. 2, 1958.
Ooedes, G.: Nouvelles donnees epigraphiques sur
l'histoire de l'Indochine centrale.
125-142.
Journal of the Burma Research Society
No. 41, 1958.
U Aung Thein: Our wars with the Burmese, a translation
from the Siamese work of Prince Damrong,
contd. fl'om No. 40, 1957. 241-347.
Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain
parts 3-4, 1958.
Hooykaas, 0.: Four-line Yamalm in the old Javanese
Ramayana ( contd. ).
Smith, D. Howard: Zaitun's Five Centuries of
Sino-foreign T1•ade.
Journal of World History
Vol. IV, 3, 1958.
122-138.
165-177.
S:nem.atzu, Y.: Japan's relations with the Asian Continent
and the Korean Peninsula (before 950 A.D.). 671-687.

Bapat, P.V.:
Lingat, R. :
PllBLtCATIONS OF INTEREST iN OTHER joURNALS
Vol. III, 2, 1958.
The Oontl'ibution of Buddhism to
Indian Culture.
La double crise de l'Eglise boucldhique
au Siam.
383-401.
Man
No. 59, 1959.
Scott.Kemball, J.: The Kalan tan Wayang Siam shadow
puppets "Ram a" and "Hanuman,"
a comparative study of their structure.
73-78.
Marg
Vol. XII, No. 2, 1959.
Anand, M.R.: On the origin of the descendants of the Sun:
some notes on the historical backgronnd of
Rajasthan. (The volume is in fact mainly
devoted to importnn t medineval gl'oups of
monum.en ts there ) .
Pacific Affairs
Vol. XXXI, 4-, 1958.
vrm der Kroef, J.A.: On the writing of Indonesian
History.
Recueils de la Societe Jean Bodin
IX l'etrauger.
Lingat, R. : Le condition c1es ett·angers au Siam an
xvne siecle.
Silpakorn
Vol. 2, No. 3, 1958.
Biras1•i, S.: The Cave Paintings of Yala
Vol. 2, No. l), 1959.
4-10.
25LV26ti.
Yupo, D.: MUl'als in the pn,vi1ion of Somdet Phra Buddha
Khosacharn. 51-54.
Biras1·i, S. : The Mural paintings of wat Bucldhai Sawnn. 55-56.

ACCESSIONS TO THE LIBRARY
from ganuary to c!June 1959
Books
M.R. Seni Pramoj & M.R. Knrit Pramoj: 'l'he King of Siam SpE>aks.
Presented by the Oentral LiMetry, Ofm,letlonglwrn, Univer·sity,
Bangkok, Thailand.
D.G. Tenclu11mr: 'l'he Mahatma Vol. 1 (1951).
D.G. Tendullmr: The Mahatma Vol. 2 (1951).
D.G. 'l'endullmr: 'rhe Mahatma Vol. 3 (1952).
D.G. Tendulkar: 'l'he Mahatma Vol. 4 (1952).
D.G. Tendulkar: The Mahatma Vol. 5 (1952).
D.G. 'l'endullmr: The Mahatma Vol. 6 (1953).
D.G. 'l'endul1mr: The Mahatma Vol. 7 (1953).
D.G. 'l'endnlkar: 'rhe Mahatma Vol. 8 (1954).
R.R. Diwakar: Mahayogi (1954:).
Edward J. 'rhomas: 'l'he Life of Buddha (1956).
Harindranath ChRttopadhyaya: Siddhartha Mau of Peace (1958).
O.C. GRngoly: Indian Architectl1l'e (1954).
Nandalal Bose: On Art (1956).
Rai Krishnadasa: Mughal Miniatures (1955).
Mulk Raj Anand: The Hindu View of Art (1957).
John Terry: 'l'he Charm of Indo-Islamic Architecture (1955).
Tapan Mohan Chatterji: Alpona (1948).
Radhakamal Mukerjee: The Social Function of Art (1951).
Chintamoni Kar: Classical Indian Sculpture (1950).
Rajendra Prasad: At the Feet of Mahatma Gandhi (1955).
Dr. S. Abid Husain: The National Culture of Inrlia (1956).
Dr. S. Radhakrishnan: Indian Philosophy (1956).
Goldstncker: Sanskrit & Culture (1955).
The Legacy of India (1951).
Gandhi to Vinoba (1956),

226 ACCESSIONS TO THE LIBRARY
Richard B. Gregg.: The Power of Non-Violence (194,9).
M.K. Gandhi: Non-Violence in Peace and War Vol. I (1948).
M.K. Gandhi: Non-Violence in Peace and War Vol. II (1949).
Sri Aurobindo: The Human Cycle (1949).
Sri Amobindo: 'l'he Life Divine (1955).
Ernest Wood: Great Systems of Yoga (1954).
Pro:iesh Banerji: Dance of India (1956).
Premaknmar : Langu.age of Kathakali (1948).
:Faubion Bowers: 'rhe Dance in India (1953).
0.0. Gangoly: Ragas and Raginis.
Sahitya Akademi: Contemporary Indian Literature (1957).
Prof. G.C. Jhala: Kalidasa-A Study (1949).
The Gospel of Sri Ramakrishnan (1947).
Dr. S. Radhakrishnan: 'rhe Dhammapada (1954).
Essential Unity of all Religions (1955).
Vedanta for the Western World (1951) .
. John Levy: 'l'he Nature of Man according to Vedanta (1956).
Dr. S. Radhakrishnan: Eastern Religions and Western Thought
(1955).
V.M. Apte: Social and Religious Life in the Grihya Sutras;
'l'he Principal Upanisads (1953).
Kurukshetra-A Symposium on Community Development in India
(1952-1955).
Pramathanath Banerjea: A Study of Indian Economics (1954).
P?·esented by the Indian Embassy.
Ceremonies Privees des Cambodgiens (1958).
Dr. Vicente G. Sinco: The University of the Philippines and its
Mission (1958).
Inlichtingen En Onclerzoeldngen Van cle Afdeling Tropisclw
Producten in 1957 (1958).
Le-Huu~M11c: Ohtl•Nghia Duy-Linh,

ACCESSIONS '1'0 THE LIBRARY 227
Annual Report of the Department of Science, Ministry of
Industry, No 20, B.E. 2500 (1958) ('rhai).
State Railway of Thai.land, Annual Report for the Year Buddhist
Era 2498 with Balance Sheets, working accounts and .Profit &
Loss account (from lst J'annary to 31st December 2498) (2501).
W.G. Goddard: Formosa (Taiwan).
A. Massoucli : China.
Doctenr Thor Peng, 'l'hong : La Thalassemia au Cambodge (1958)·
Doctenr So]\ Heangsun : L'Hemoglobine E an Cambodge (1958).
H.Hack: Dutch Group Settlement in Brazil (1959).
R.L. Mellema: Een Interpretatie Van de Islaam (1958).
Atoms for Peace Awards: A Memorial to Henry :Ford lmd Edsel
Ford (1956).
R.Y. Lefebvre d'Argence: Les Ceramiques A Base Chocolatee au
Musee Louis-Finot de l'Ecole l!,rangaise d'Extreme-Orient a
Hanoi (1958).
'l'he Betrayal of Buddhism (195G).
The Revolt in the 'femple (1953).
50th Anniversary, Diethelm & Co., Ltd., Banglz;o]r,
Daniel S. Lev : A Bibliography of Indonesian Government
Documents and Selected Indonesian writings on Government
in the Cornell University Library (1958).
Prajnab Tirabutana : A. Simple One -The Story of a Siamese
Girlhood (1958).
Anthony H. Johns: Rantjak Dilabueh (1958).
H.E. Professor Oliveira Salazar: On Empowering the Executive
Committee of the National Union (1958).
Viet-Nam Past and Present (1957).
Dania Polyglotta, Douzieme Annee 1956 (1957).
Melville Jacobs: The Content a11d Style of an Ot•al Literature
Olac¥.a:maf3 Ohh1oo:)r Myths and Tales (1959).

228 ACCESSIONS TO THE LIBRARY
Phra Achan Chin· Dharma Samadhivatara (Pu-Cheng): Buddhism
in Mahayana Doctrine (1958).
Phra Achan Chin Dharma Samadhivatara (Pn-Cheng): The Sixth
Paths of Metempsychosis in Buddhism (1958).
Phra Achan Chin Dharma Samadhivatat'a (Pn-Cheng): Marana­
Upaya in Buddhism (1958).
Phra Achan Chin Dharma Samadhivatara (Pu-Cheng): The Bt~5!:_­
dbist Dharma & Its Substantial Laws (1958).
Phra Achan Ohin Dharma Samadhivatara (Pn-Cheng):
Prayer & Meditation in Buddhism (1958).
The
Phra Achan Chin Dharma Samadhivatara (Pu-Cheng): Buddhism
(1958).
Phra Achan Chin Dharma Samadbivatara (Pu-Oheng): The Pan·
chaclba Karma in Buddhism (1958).
'Phe Presentation of tho Pirst Atoms for Peace Award to Niels
Hornik David Bohr at the National Academy of Sciences
Washington D.C. October 24, 1957.
Sarah V. Apperson: World-Blindness its Cause and Effect (1958).
George Ooedes: Religioni Dell' Indochina (Birrnanis, Thailandia,
Cambogia, Laos et Viet-Nam (1958).
H.G. Qnaritch Wales: Prehistory and Religion in South-East
Asia.
G. Coeclbs: Jean-Philippe Vogel (1957).
G. Coedes: Nouvelles Donnees Epigrapiqnes sur I'Histoire de
l'Inclochine Centrale (1958).
Premier Chen Cheng's Report to the Legislative Yuan (Verbal
Report) February 20, 1959.
President Chiang Kai-Shek, Selected Speeches and Messages in
1958.

ACCESSiONS TO THE LlBt\ARY 229
Periodicals
Acta Biologica Venezuelica, Vol. 2, Arts 18-19.
Administration Report of ]'isheries Madras for the Year 1956-57.
American Museum of Natural History, Bulletin of the, Vol. 115,
Arts 5; Vol. 116, Arts. 1-4.
Ananai, the, Spring Special 1959.
Annals of the Hitotsubashi Academy, the, Vol. IX, No. 2.
Annual Report for the Year Ended June 30, 1958, the United
States National Museum, Smithsonian Institution.
Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress for the Fiscal Year
Ending June 30, 1958.
Archaeology and Anthropology, Bulletin of the Department of,
No. II.
Archiv Orientalni, 2Gj4, 1958.
Arkiv for Botanik, Andra Sel'ien, Band 4, Heft 1.
Arkiv for Zoologi, Andra Serien, Band XI, Hafte 5.6, Band XII,
Hafte 1.
A.rtibus Asiae, Vol. XXI, Pts. 1-2.
Arts A.siatiques, Tome V, Fasc. 1, 2, 3.
Asian Bibliography, Vol. VII, No. 2.
Asian Culture, Vol. I, No. 1.
Asiatique, Journal, Tome CCXIJV, Fasc. No. 4; Tome CCXLVI,
Fasc. Nos. 1-2.
Baess1er-Archiv, Ne~e Folge, Band VI, Heft 2.
Bibliography of Scientific Publications of South & South East
Asia, Vol. 4, No. 12; Vol. 5, No. 2-5.
Bombay Natural History Society, Journal of the, Vol. 55, No. 3.
Bonner Geographische A bht\ndlungen, Heft 23-24.
Breviora Museum of Comparative Zoology, Nos. 97-101, 1958.
Buddhism, (Thai), 27th Year, No. 1 & 2.

23o
AccEssioNs To THE LiBRARY
Burma Research Society, Journal of the, Vol. XLI, Pts. 1 & 2.
Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, Journal of the, Vol.
XVIII, No. 54, 1904 ; Vol, XXXII, No. 85, Pts. I, II, III, IV;
Vol. XXXVI, Pt. III, 1945.
Ceylon Historical .Tournai, the, Vol. VII, Nos. 1-4.
Contributions front the Dudley Herbarium, Vol. 5, Nos. 3.4-.
Cornell University Agricultnral Experiment Station, Memoir 354,
1958.
Council for Sciences of Indonesia, Vol. I, No. 2. Courier, No. 12.
Dansk Botanik Arkiv, Band 18, No. 3.
East ancl West, New Series, Vol. 9, No. 3, 4.
Ecole I!'ranQnise d'Extrome-Orient, Bulletin de 1', Tome XLIX,
Fasc. 1.
Egypt 'l'ravel Magazin, Nos. 52, 54, 1959.
Encounter, Vol. XII, Nos. 1, 4, 6.
li'ar Eastern Accessions List to Co1•nell University Library, Nos.
1-3, 1959.
l!'lorida State Museum, Biological Sciences, Bulletin of the, Vol.B,
Nos. 4-5; Vol. IY, Nos. 1-3.
l!'oreign Review of President Chiang's Book: Soviet Russia in
China, Vol. 2.
France-Asia, Tome XV, Nos. 149-150; Tome XVI, Nos. 151-152.
Pree China Review, Vol. VIII, No. 12; Vol. IX, No. 5.
French Bibliographical Digest, Series II, Vol. 26.
Geological Society of China, Proceedings of tho, No. 2, 1959.
Health Bulletin, (Thai), 28th Year, Vol. 4.
India Quarterly, Vol. XIV, Nos. 3-4; Vol. XV, No. I.
Indian and Buddhist Studies, Jotn•nal of, Vol. VII, Nos. 1-2.
Indo-Asian Culture, the, Vol. VII, Nos. 2-3.
Insdoc List, Vol. 5, No. 9; Vol. 6, Nos. 4-5, 9.

ACCESSiON~ TO THE LIBRARY
23i
institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Tome XXXIV,
Nos. 1-45.
Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, DeuxHm1e
Serie, Memoires Fasc. 5l:i-57.
lnsiitut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgiqne 1 Memoire Nos.
139-143.
International CommitteE' on Urgent Anthropologjcal and Ethnolo.
gical Research, Bulletin of the, No. 1 1 1958.
Inte1·national Conference of Orientalists in Ja-pan, Transactions
of the, No. III, 1958.
Jahrbuch des Museums fur Volkerkunde zu Leipzig, Band XVI,
1957.
Japanese Journal of Ethnology, the, Vol. 22, Nos. 3-4.
JaprLnese Journal of 'Ethnology Minzokugakn-Kenl;:yu, the, Vol.
23. Nos. 1 & 2.
Kungl Vetenskaps-Societetens Arsbok 1958.
Maha Bodhi, the, Vol. 66, No. 12; Vol. 67, Nos. 1-2, 3 & 4, 5.
Malayan Branch, Royal Asiatic Society, Journal of the, VoL XXX,
Pt. 2.
Microentomology, Vol. 23, Pt. 3.
Monthly Economic Review, the, 2nd Yetu·, Vol. 6-7, ('l'hai).
Museum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Bulletin clu, 2e Serie,
Tome XXX, Nos. 5-6; 'l'ome XXXI, No. 1.
Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College, Bulletin of
the, Vol. 119, Nos. 6-9: Vol. 1fW, Nos. 1-2.
Museum of IHne Arts, Boston, Bulletin, Vo1. LVI, Nos. 305-306.
Muslim World, the, Vol. XLIX, Nos. 1-2.
Natur Und Volk, Band 88, Heft 9-12; Band 89, Heft 1-4.
Newsletter, Vol. IX, No. 2.
Nyt'li Magnsin for Zoologi, Vol. 6-7.
Oriens Extremus, Jahrgang, Heft 1.
Orient Occident, Vol. I, Nos. 5-6; Vol. II, No. 1.
Pacific Science, Vol. XIII, No. 2.

232 ACCESSIONS TO THE LIBRARY
Philippine Social Sciences and Humanities Review, Vol. XXIII,
No.1.
Report of the Di"rector for 1957-1958, }!'lorida State Mnseum 1
University of Florida, 1958.
Research Information Bulletin, No. 4.
Reviews Foundation for the Welfare of the Crippled, Vol. 3, 1959,
(Tiuli).
Revue Hort.icole de !'Algerie, ()2me Anm~e, Nos. 8-11.
Sarawak Museum J01Hnal, the, Vol. VIII, No.2.
School of Oriental and Afric

CORRIGENDA
ln .ISS XL VII, part 1, on page 10 under the heading of
Note by the translator
(line 4 ) " (e) the suhst,itntioll nf u certain letter bin place of b"
:;Jwuld l'NLil-
" (

PUBLICATIONS Of THE _SIAM SOCIETY
l •. 'fhe Journal ...., per number
~· Ati Siames~ Numbers-v.er mimber
3. 'Index to V oltlmea, I to XXV. • ••
. . . ... ~
4:. Index to the Journal, Vlufuea .XXVI to .XL .,....
5. W. Oredner: Oult'ural a.n,d Geographical Observations
riiaM in. ~he TaU (Yunnan) Region (translated from
. German by MajorEt;ik Seidenfaden) , ••
;,
it Flqrae SiamerisisclJlnumeratio~pel,' number ••• •••
. '1. Tba NaturalHistory Bulletin.::per number . .. :. • • ••
;. 8. John Bla_ck. F.RG.S.: ·• The Lofty Sahc.tuar:v of E:hao .Phra Vihii.r .
.. 9. The Commemorative Publication issued oti.the occasion
.. of tb,e Society's 50th Anniversary : ·
One Set (vors~ I & 11 ), cloth.:bol.lnd •· ..
Vola.· i throllgh VIII;. pap'el'-bouud (each)
l():'The .MOD, :Dictio11ary -~ .. • • • ••
U. 'Descriptive Catalogue o:ftho S'ta.mpa of Biat:n •••
12; R~ginald ~~ May ~ o:rhe C~ina.ge 'of Siam • ••
... ~ .
...
..
'a4·•
. (out of print)
(out of print)
, · (o1.1t of print")··
Btir~liy. &t. Rober..t tin.gat·: L~is ·. Siamoisea,
1'8Qi> A~ D '• Lois Divprsea • • • .. ' (ont(br prin.t)
Price (Baht )
ao.oo
10.00
12.'00
12.00
3.00
30.00
120.00
50.00